Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 482

CV2015 DESIGN OF

STEEL MEMBERS
PROFESSOR:
CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ
BS, MSc, PhD Candidate
Office 1: A4-136A Tel. 8328-4213 Ext. 108
Office 2: LD-206E 8358-2000 Ext. 5377
E-mail: carlos.nungaray@itesm.mx
DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING
ITESM – TECNOLÓGICO DE MONTERREY
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 1

BEFORE WE START…

TURN OFF YOUR CELL PHONE


(PENALTIES DUE TO THE USE OF YOUR
CELL PHONE IN CLASS WILL BE
DETAILED LATER)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 2

1
SESSION 1

CONTENTS, POLICIES, AND


GENERALITIES
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 3

Structural Design
 Paraphrasing Hardy Cross:

First design the structure using your best


judgement, then analyze the structure. If your
numbers do not support your design, then re-
evaluate your numbers. If the numbers still do
not support your design, then evaluate where
your judgement may be in error

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 4

2
Course Objectives
1. To apply the basic knowledge of Solid Mechanics and
Structural Analysis to analyze and design structural
steel members including:
1. Tension
2. Compression
3. Bending
4. Combined axial load and bending
5. Simple connections
2. Establish the bases for the study of the design of steel
structures in a later course (CV00-896 Design of Steel
Structures).

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 5

Design Code
 The designs will be based on the concept of limit
states and the specifications of the American
Institute of Steel Construction (AISC, 13th
Edition of the Steel Construction Manual, 2005).

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 6

3
Course Sessions
 Session 1: Course Contents, Policies, and
Generalities
 Session 2: Design Methods
 Session 3: Structural Steel
 Session 4: Design of Members for Tension:
Chapter D of AISC Specifications
 Session 5: Design of Members for Tension:
Example 1
 Session 6: Design of Members for Tension:
Example 2
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 7

Course Sessions
 Session 12: Design Example #1 of a Doubly
Symmetric Column
 Session 13: Design Example #2 of a Doubly
Symmetric Column
 Session 14: Local Buckling and Flexural-
Torsional Buckling
 Session 15: Example: Flexural-Torsional
Buckling without Local Buckling
 Session 16: Example: Flexural-Torsional
Buckling with Local Buckling
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 8

4
Course Sessions
 Session 17: Design of Members for Flexure
 Session 18: Design of Laterally Supported
Beams in Bending About their Major Axis by
Elastic Analysis
 Session 19: Design of Laterally Unsupported
Beams in Bending About their Major Axis by
Elastic Analysis
 Session 20: Introduction to Plastic Analysis
 Session 21: Plastic Design of Laterally
Supported Beams
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 9

Course Sessions
 Session 22: Elasto-plastic analysis and Plastic
Design of Laterally Unsupported Beams
 Session 23: Introduction to the Design of
Members subjected to the Combined Effects of
Bending and Axial Force
 Session 24: Design of Beam-Columns
 Session 25: Design of Beam-Columns Using
Appendix 7 of the AISC Manual, 13th Edition

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 10

5
Course Contents
1. Module 1: Generalities.
2. Module 2: Tension Members.
3. Module 3: Simple Welded/Bolted Connections.
4. Module 4: Compression Members.
5. Module 5: Beams.
6. Module 6: Beam - Columns.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 11

Methodology
1. Explanation, given by the professor, of the theoretical
bases corresponding to each subject of the course.
2. In-class problem solution.
3. Homework assignments to reinforce the understanding
of each subject.
4. The students will carry out a final project working in
teams. Most likely, the final project will consist of the
design of a steel frame office building.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 12

6
Methodology
5. Three partial exams will be applied.
6. One comprehensive final exam.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 13

Evaluation Policies
 Three partials 40%
 Final project 30%
 Final exam 30%
 Minimum passing grade: 70
 If a student has an average in the homework
assignments of at least 75/100, he/she obtains five
additional points in his/her final grade.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 14

7
Textbooks
 Steel Construction Manual,
13th Edition. American Institute
of Steel Construction. 2005.

 Steel Structures: Design and


Behavior Emphasizing Load
and Resistance Factor Design,
5th Edition. Charles G.
Salmon, John E. Johnson, and
Faris A. Malhas. Pearson
Education. 2009. A copy of this
is in Reserve.
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 15

Reference Books
 Structural Steel Design:
LRFD Method, 4th
Edition. Jack C.
McCormac. Pearson
Education. 2008.

 Unified Design of Steel


Structures. Louis F.
Geschwindner. Wiley.
2007.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 16

8
Reference Books
 Steel Design, 4th Edition.
William T. Segui.
Thomson/Brooks Cole.
2007.

 Structural Steel Design: A


Practice-Oriented
Approach. Abi Aghayere
and Jason Vigil. Pearson
Education. 2009.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 17

Reference Books
 Based on previous editions of the AISC
specifications:
 Basic Steel Design with LRFD. Theodore V.
Galambos, F. J. Lin, and Bruce G. Johnston. Prentice
Hall. 1996.
 Design of Steel Structures, 3rd Edition. Edwin H.
Gaylord, Charles N. Gaylord & James E. Stallmeyer.
McGraw-Hill. 1992.
 Steel Structures: Behavior and LRFD. Sriramulu
Vinnakota. McGraw-Hill. 2006.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 18

9
Reference Books
 Based on other countries’ specifications:
 Limit States Design in Structural Steel, 8th Edition.
Geoffrey L. Kulak and Gilbert Grondin. Canadian
Institute of Steel Construction. 2009.
 The Behaviour and Design of Steel Structures to
BS5950, 3rd Edition. N. S. Trahair, M. A. Bradford,
and D. A. Nethercot. Spon Press. 2001.
 Manual of Steel Construction, ASD 9th Edition.
American Institute of Steel Construction. 1989. (The
13th edition of the manual includes ASD specifications
but they are different).

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 19

Reference Books
 Based on ASD specifications:
 Manual of Steel Construction, ASD 9th Edition.
American Institute of Steel Construction. 1989. (The
13th edition of the manual includes ASD specifications
but they are different). The ASD specifications used in
Mexico are those from the AISC-ASD 9th Edition.
 Steel Structures: Design and Behavior Emphasizing
Load and Resistance Factor Design, 4th Edition.
Charles G. Salmon and John E. Johnson. Pearson
Education. 1996.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 20

10
Teaching Aids
 Manual de Apoyo Didáctico para la Enseñanza del
Diseño de Elementos de Acero. Carlos E. Nungaray
P. 2009.
 Today’s Structural Steel – Shaping the Future
(Video).
 The Single Story Building (Video)
 Steel Frame Construction – Your Best Answer
(Video)
 The Behavior of Columns (Video)
 The Behavior of Unrestrained Steel Beams (Video)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 21

Software
 STAAD/Pro V8i

 STAAD(X) V8i

 RAM Elements

 RAM Structural System V8i

 RAM Connection V8i

 MathCAD 14
 AutoCAD
 Programs/Exel macros written by the students

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 22

11
My Policies
 Cell phone use in class is not allowed. A 10 point
penalization in the corresponding exam (partial or final) will be
applied if this policy is not followed. Exceptions must be dealt
with before the session starts.
Advice: turn off your telephone before getting into the
classroom!
 Cell phone is strictly prohibited during exams. Any use of a
cell phone will result in a grade of zero in the exam (partial or
final).
 No loose sheets are allowed in the exams. All sheets must be
kept stapled together at all time during the exam. A 10 point
penalization in the corresponding exam (partial or final) will be
applied if this policy is not followed.
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 23

My Policies
 No student will be allowed to take the final exam at a
date other than the official date based on the institution’s
calendar

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 24

12
My Policies
 Once the class/exam has started, no one will be allowed
to leave the classroom. Again, exceptions must be dealt
with before the session starts.
 In an exam, when you are told to stop writing you should
do so and hand in your exam immediately. An exam
handed in once I left the classroom will be automatically
assigned a grade of zero.
 If a student does not show up for an exam he/she will be
allowed to take the exam at a different date provided
he/she gets a written authorization from the
Undergraduate Program Director. No exam will be
applied without this written authorization. (The exam that
was missed will be evaluated based on the final exam).
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 25

My Policies
 Partial exams will be two hours long unless the students
decide to take the exam during class time. Only material
allowed: AISC Manual without annotations and a
scientific, nonprogrammable calculator
 Final exam will be three hours long. Only material
allowed: AISC Manual without annotations and a
scientific, nonprogrammable calculator
 Use of material other than allowed in an exam will result
in an Academic Dishonesty penalization (DA)
 Sharing of materials in an exam is prohibited. Failure to
follow this will result in a failing grade
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 26

13
My Policies
 Assignments must be professionally done and they must
be done based on the following guidelines (ask for a
sample homework assignment solution before handing in
the first assignment):
 A short problem statement must be included for each problem.
 Sketches must be done using straight edges, compass, etc.
 The results must be clearly identified.
 Recycled paper is not allowed.
 The solution procedure must be easy to follow in order to grade
the assignment.
 Poorly written/presented assignments will not be graded.
 Each problem must be started in a new sheet.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 27

My Policies: Design Process


 Structural design consists
of:
 Structural analysis
 Preliminary selection of steel Structural
Analysis
shapes
 Re-analysis of the structure based
on the properties of the selected
shapes Structural
 Adequacy check of the selected Design
shapes based on the results of the
Re-analysis of
new structural analysis the structure
and design
 The process is repeated check
until all steel shapes are
adequate to resist the
applied loads
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 28

14
My Policies
 Structural analysis plays a very important role in the
design process
 Consequently, if the structural analysis for the solution of
any problem and/or the values of the design loads are
not correct, that problem will be drastically penalized (up
to 100% based on the magnitude of the error or mistake)
in:
 Homework assignments
 Partial exams
 Final project
 Final exam

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 29

Prerequisites
 During the semester we will be using concepts from
previous courses such as:
 CV2003 Solid Mechanics I
 CV2009 Solid Mechanics II
 CV2005 Structural Analysis
 It is the student’s responsibility to review such concepts
before they are used in this course
 The table in the next slide provides you with the most
important concepts to be reviewed and their relationship
with this course’s subjects
 Be aware that the list is not comprehensive
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 30

15
Prerequisites
CV2015 Subject Required material Course

Tension members Axially loaded members in Solid Mechanics I


tension, simple shear stress
Von Mises’ failure theory Solid Mechanics II

Simple connections Simple shear stress, contact Solid Mechanics I


stress
Compression members Column theory, elastic and Solid Mechanics II
(columns) inelastic buckling, effective
length, sectorial area, shear
center, properties of areas
Members in bending (beams) Normal stress, shear stress, Solid Mechanics I
deflections
Restrained bending Solid Mechanics II
Continuous beams Structural Analysis

Members under combined Frame analysis Structural Analysis


stresses (beam-columns)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 31

MODULE #1
GENERALITIES

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 32

16
Advantages of Structural Steel
 Safety
 Quality control
 Greater flexibility to incorporate changes
 Less personnel
 Greater strength per unit weight
 Concrete: f’c = 5 ksi; γc = 150 pcf
5 ksi ksi
Ratio Concrete = = 33.33 × 10−3
150 pcf pcf

 Steel: Fy = 36 ksi; γs = 490 pcf


36 ksi ksi
Ratio Steel = = 73.47 × 10−3
490 pcf pcf
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 33

Advantages of Structural Steel


 Less construction time
 Feasibility to work in
different floors at the
same time

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 34

17
Advantages of Structural Steel
 Ease of transportation

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 35

Advantages of Structural Steel


 Feasibility to work under
difficult weather
conditions

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 36

18
Advantages of Structural Steel
 Uniformity of properties with time
 Elasticity for high values of stresses
 Durability
 Ductility
 Toughness
 Ease to do connections
 Adaptability to prefabrication
 Fatigue strength
 Reuse and recyicling

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 37

Disadvantages of Structural Steel


 Painting requirements
 Moment connections are expensive
 Maintenance costs

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 38

19
Disadvantages of Structural Steel
 Fatigue
 Brittle fracture

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 39

Disadvantages of Structural Steel


 Variations in the
price

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 40

20
Disadvantages of Structural Steel
 Greater need for fire
protection

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 41

Disadvantages of Structural Steel


 Painting
requirements
 Susceptibility to
corrosion

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 42

21
Disadvantages of Structural Steel
 Susceptibility to
buckling

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 43

SESSION 2

DESIGN METHODS

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 44

22
Session 2: Objectives
 At the end of this session the student should be
able to:
 Describe briefly the different design methods with
their advantages and disadvantages
 Define the concept of limit state and the different
types of limit states
 Understand the concept of reliability index
 Apply the load combinations for LRFD design

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 45

Design Methods
 Allowable Stress Design (ASD)
 Plastic Design (PD)
 Limit States Design (LSD in Canada and other
countries) or Load and Resistance Factor
Design (LRFD in United States)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 46

23
Basic Design Requirement
 Safety

Strength ≥ Load Effects

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 47

Basic Design Requirement


 Although the main design objective is the same
in the three methods, they differ widely in their
approach to structural safety
 In any method it is recognized the possibility that
failure will occur

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 48

24
Design Goals
 Safety
 Functionality
 Economy
 Aesthetics (left to architects)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 49

Allowable Stress Design (ASD)


 Rn = nominal strength
 FS = factor of safety
 ΣQs = combined service
Rn load effects
≥ ∑ Qs  Disadvantages:
FS  Considers all loads with the
same variability
 Does not provide uniform
reliability
 Does not control the
probability of failure

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 50

25
Plastic Design (PD)
 Rn = nominal strength
 LF = load factor
 ΣQs = combined service load

Rn ≥ LF ∑ Qs
effects
 Disadvantages:
 Considers all loads with the
same variability
 Does not provide uniform
reliability
 Does not control the
probability of failure
 Basically the same
disadvantages as those of
ASD

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 51

Load and Resistance Factor Design


(LRFD)

φ Rn ≥ ∑ α i Qsi
 φ = resistance factor
 Rn = nominal strength
 αi = load factor for service load Qsi
 Advantages:
 Considers random variations in loads and strength
 Uses load factors consistent with the corresponding load
variability
 Arrives at a nearly uniform level of safety for the structure and its
components
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 52

26
LRFD – Design Philosophy
 Applies principles of probability theory and
statistics to the analysis of loads and strentghs
 LRFD is based on the concept that the structure
will not exceed the limit states that govern its
strength and behavior for any realistic load or
load combination

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 53

Safety in LRFD
 Reliability index (β): number of
standard deviations of ln(R/Q)
in the distance from the origin
to the mean, where
R = strength
and
Q = load effects
 The value of β can be changed
according with the criticality of
the failure mode by means of
the resistance factor (φ): the
more critical the failure mode,
the smaller the value of φ
Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 54

27
Safety in ASD, PD, and LRFD
R/ FS QS RS R,Q

ASD
(LF)Q S Qs RS R,Q

PD
Probabilit y
Densit y

LRFD
Qm Rm R,Q

Reference: Adapted from Galambos, Lin, and


Johnston

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 55

Safety in ASD
 There might be problems with the safety of a
structure when the loads acting on it have
opposite effects
 The following example can help to illustrate the
problem

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 56

28
Safety in ASD
Tension member design: Tension member design:
Case A Case B

 D = 100±10 kips (Compression)  D = 10±1 kips (Compression)


 W = 150±100 kips (Tension)  W = 60±40 kips (Tension)
 Dead load has a ±10% variation  Dead load has a ±10% variation
 Wind load has a ±66.67%  Wind load has a ±66.67%
variation variation
 Design load = 50 kips  Design load = 50 kips

Since the load variations and the design loads are the same in both cases, it is
expected to get designs with the same required factor of safety, FS, in both
cases
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 57

Safety in ASD
FSreqd for Case A FSreqd for Case B

Maximum Tension − Minimum Compression Maximum Tension − Minimum Compression


FS reqd = FS reqd =
Design Load Design Load

FS reqd =
(150 + 100 ) − (100 − 10 ) = 160 FS reqd =
( 60 + 40 ) − (10 − 1) = 91
50 50 50 50
FS reqd = 3.2 FS reqd = 1.82

As it can be seen, eventhough the two designs have equal design loads, are
subjected to the action of the same types of loads, and loads have equal
variations, the required factors of safety are very different for each case

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 58

29
Safety in LRFD
 LRFD provides uniform reliability and this is why
it is the design method that will be used in this
course
 Hence, situations such as the one described in
the previous example are not present when
LRFD is used

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 59

Definition of Limit States


 LRFD is a Limit State - based design method
 A limit state is a (limiting) condition against
which the performance of a structure is checked
at appropriate load levels
 The appropriate load level used to check a limit
state must be consistent with the type of limit
state being checked

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 60

30
Types of Limit States
 Ultimate limit states
 Serviceability limit states
 Special cases such as fatigue

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 61

Types of Limit States


 Ultimate limit states
 They are directly related with failure
 Violation of one of these involves failure or loss of all or parts of the
structure
 Since they have to do with safety, they are checked using factored
loads so that the structure is protected against loads that seldom occur
 Examples of ultimate limit states (not a complete list):
 Yielding
 Rupture
 Fracture (associated with fatigue)
 Generalized column buckling by flexure
 Beam lateral-torsional buckling
 Local Buckling
 Block shear failure
 Tear-out failure

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 62

31
Examples of Ultimate Limit States
 Frame instability

 Column buckling

Reference: Martini

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 63

Examples of Ultimate Limit States


 Beam lateral-torsional
buckling

Reference: Tall (Ed.). Reference: ESDEP

Reference: Imperial College

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 64

32
Examples of Ultimate Limit States
 Beam lateral-torsional
buckling

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 65

Examples of Ultimate Limit States


 Compression flange local
buckling

Reference: Tall (Ed.).

 Local buckling of a
column

Reference: Zureick.
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 66

33
Examples of Ultimate Limit States
 Tension member rupture

Reference: Kulak et al.

Reference: McGuire (1968)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 67

Examples of Ultimate Limit States


 Tension member rupture

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 68

34
Examples of Ultimate Limit States

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 69

Examples of Ultimate Limit States


 Block shear
rupture- (Gusset
plate shown)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 70

35
Examples of Ultimate Limit States

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 71

Examples of Ultimate Limit States


 Tension member block
shear rupture

 Block shear rupture -


alternate load path- (WT
section shown)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 72

36
Examples of Ultimate Limit States
 Block shear rupture
failures in coped
beams

Ref.: Franchuk, Driver, and


Grondin

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 73

Examples of Ultimate Limit States


 Structural collapse

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 74

37
Types of Limit States
 Serviceability limit states
 They are related with the operating conditions of the structure
different from failure
 Violation of one of these does not involve an actual failure of the
structure or part of it, although the structure has reached a limit
of acceptable behavior
 Since thay have to do with the normal operating conditions of the
structure, they are checked using loads that are very likely to
occur during the normal life of the structure (service loads)
 Examples:
 Excessive deflection

 Vibrations

 Excessive drift

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 75

Examples of Serviceability Limit


States
 Excessive deflection
(open web steel joist
shown)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 76

38
Special Case of Limit States
 Fatigue limit states
 These mark the onset of unstable crack growth due to
a stress range due to loads that are likely to occur in
the structure (service loads)
 They can lead to a failure
 Since they can under reasonable frequent loads,
fatigue checks are done using service loads
 Hence, fatigue is an ultimate limit state that is
checked using service loads.
 This is why fatigue is considered a special limit state

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 77

Fatigue Limit States

σ min
R=
σ max

Reference: Gaylord, Gaylord, and Stallmeyer.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 78

39
Load Types (AISC Page 2-8)
 D = Dead load
 L = Live load due to occupancy
 Lr = Roof live load
 S = Snow load
 R = Rainwater or ice load (exclusive of ponding)
 W = Wind load
 E = Earthquake load

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 79

Load Combinations
1. Dead load only  Combinations 1 and 2:
2. Dead and live loads β = 3.0
3. Dead, snow and live or  Combinations 3 and 4:
wind loads β = 2.5
4. Dead, live, and wind
loads
5. Dead, earthquake, and  Combinations 5 and 6:
live or snow loads β = 1.75
6. Dead and earthquake
or wind loads

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 80

40
Reliability Index and Probability of
Failure
 Combinations 1 and 2 (dead and live loads):
β = 3.0.
 Combinations 3 and 4 (dead, live, snow and wind loads):
β = 2.5.
 Combinations 5 and 6 (dead, live, snow, wind, and
earthquake loads):
β = 1.75.

 β=5 Pf = 2.9x10-6.
 β=4 Pf = 3.2x10-5 .
 β=3 Pf = 1.4x10-3 .
 β=2 Pf = 2.3x10-2 .

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 81

Load Combinations
 1.4D
 1.2D+1.6L+0.5(Lr or S or R)
 1.2D+1.6(Lr or S or R)+(0.5L or 0.8W)
 1.2D+1.6W+0.5L+0.5(Lr or S or R)
 1.2D±1.0E+0.5L+0.2S
 0.9D±(1.6W or 1.0E)

Note: The load factor on L in combinations 3, 4, and 5 shall equal 1 for


garages, areas occupied as places of public assembly, and all areas
where the live load is greater than 100 psf (≈ 500 kg/m2).
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 82

41
Resistance Factors (φ)
 The values of the resistance factor for some ultimate
limit states are as follows:
 0.75 for:
 Rupture
 Connections
 Block shear rupture
 0.90 for:
 Yielding
 Bending
 Shear (plate girders, columns)
 Axial compression
 1.00 for:
 Local web yielding
 Slip-critical connections with standard holes
 Shear (rolled shapes, connecting elements)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 83

SESSION 3

STRUCTURAL STEEL

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 84

42
Objectives
 At the end of this session the student will be able
to
 Identify all the strength properties of steel
 Identify all the stiffness properties of steel
 Understand the concepts of ductility, brittleness, and
toughness

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 85

Properties of Structural Steel


 Before 1960 only ASTM A7 (Fy = 33 ksi) steel
was used.
 Other steel were available in those years but
were not of frequent use with the excemption of
some bridges:
 A242 (low-alloy, corrosion-resistant).
 A373 (easier to weld).

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 86

43
Properties of Structural Steel
 Currently there are more types of steel
available:
 Carbon steels.
 High-strength, low-alloy steels.
 Low-alloy steels.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 87

Properties of Structural Steel


 Carbon steels (A36, A53, A500, A501, A529,
A570, A611 y A709, Grade 36):
 Low carbon content (<0.15%).
 Mild steels (0.16 – 0.29%). Structural steels such as
A36 belong to this group.
 Medium carbon content (0.30 – 0.59%).
 High carbon content (0.60-1.70%).

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 88

44
Properties of Structural Steel
 High-strength, low-alloy steels (A242, A441,
A572, A588, A606, A607, A618, A709 Grade
50 y A992) whose yield stress is in between 40
and 70 ksi.
 Low-alloy steels (A514, A709 Grado 100,
A852, y A913) whose yield stress is in between
80 and 110 ksi.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 89

Properties of Structural Steel


 Strength
 Yield stress (Fy)
 Tensile strength (Fu)
 Stiffness
 Modulus of elasticity (E = 29,000 ksi)
 Shear modulus of elasticity (G = 11,200 ksi)
 Ductility
 Toughness

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 90

45
Strength
 Yield stress (Fy): First stress in the material, less
than the maximum attainable, at which an
increase in strain occurs without an increase in
stress
 Tensile strength (Fu): Maximum tensile stress
that the material is capable of sustaining. It
corresponds to the highest point on the stress-
strain curve

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 91

Strength
Stress
Tensile Strength
Yield Stress

Elastic Strain Hardening Necking and


Behavior
failure
Plastic Flow

Strain

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 92

46
Stiffness
 Modulus of elasticity (E = 29,000 ksi)
 Shear modulus of elasticity (G = 11,200 ksi)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 93

Ductility

 Ductility: Ability of the material to undergo large


deformations without fracture.
 Ductility indicators:
 % of elongation.
 % of area reduction.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 94

47
Properties of Common Structural
Steels
Property A36 A572 Gr. 50 A992
(M, S, C, MC, (HP) (W)
and L; plates
and bars)
Yield stress 36 ksi 50 ksi 50 ksi

Tensile 58 to 80 ksi 65 ksi 65 ksi


strength
Ratio Fy/Fu ─ ─ 0.85
% Elongation 20 18 18
in 8”, minimum
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 95

Toughness
 The capacity to absorb large amounts of energy
before failure. It is a desirable property for
structures subject to impact loads (such as
bridges) and earthquake loads
 At room temperature, common structural steels
are very tough and fail in a ductile manner
 As temperature drops, a point is reached at
which the steel loses its toughness and fails in a
brittle, rather than ductile, manner

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 96

48
Toughness

Energy Transition Range

Mostly Ductile Fracture


20 Joules

Mostly Brittle
Fracture Transition temperature

Temperature, ºC

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 97

Temperature Effects on Yield


Stress

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 98

49
Temperature Effects on Tensile
Strength

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 99

Temperature Effects on the


Modulus of Elasticity

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 100

50
Temperature Effects on the
Properties of Steel

Reference: AISC Manual


JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 101

Temperature Effects on the


Properties of Concrete

Reference: AISC Manual


JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 102

51
Temperature Effects – Fire Test

Reference: Lamont

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 103

Types of Steel

Reference: Salmon, Johnson, and Malhas.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 104

52
Types of Steel

Reference: Salmon, Johnson, and Malhas.


JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 105

Types of Steel

Reference: Salmon, Johnson, and Malhas.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 106

53
Types of Steel

Reference: Salmon, Johnson, and Malhas.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 107

Stress-Strain Curves

Reference: Salmon, Johnson, and Malhas.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 108

54
Common Uses of Different Steels

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 109


Reference: Salmon, Johnson, and Malhas.

Common Uses of Different Steels

Reference: Salmon, Johnson, and Malhas.


JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 110

55
Reference: AISC Manual.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 111

Reference: AISC Manual.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 112

56
Reference: AISC Manual.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 113

Manual of Steel Construction


Design Subject Chapter(s) of the AISC Manual
(Part 16)
Members in Tension D and J
Simple Connections J
Members in Compression E
Members in Bending F (bending) and G (shear)
Member Subjected to Combined C and H
Stresses (Axial Compression and
Bending)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 114

57
Manual of Steel Construction
Design Subject Design Aids in the AISC Manual
Members in Tension Part 5
Simple Connections Parts 7, 8, and 9
Members in Compression Part 4
Members in Bending Part 3
Member Subjected to Combined Part 6
Stresses (Axial Compression and
Bending)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 115

MODULE #2
DESIGN OF TENSION MEMBERS

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 116

58
SESSION 4

DESIGN OF TENSION
MEMBERS
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 117

Objectives
 At the end of this session the student should be
able to:
 Identify all of the applicable ultimate limit states for
members in tension and explain why they are considered
to be ultimate limit states
 Identify all of the applicable serviceability limit states for
members in tension and explain the reason why they are
considered as such
 Calculate the cross section properties pertaining to the
design of members in tension
 Apply Chapter D and pertinent sections of Chapter J of the
AISC Manual to the design of tension members
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 118

59
Limit States for Tension Members
 Ultimate limit states:
 Yielding in gross area
 Rupture in effective area
 Block shear rupture
 Serviceability limit states
 Vibration
 Fatigue (not covered in this course)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 119

Yielding on Gross Area


 A limit condition is reached
when excessive elongations
and deformations in the
tension member (see the
plastic flow part of the σ-ε
curve)
 Excessive elongations
occur in the length of the
tension member outside the
connections
 The cross sectional area
there is the gross area
Reference: Salmon, Johnson, and Malhas.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 120

60
Yielding on Gross Area
 The gross area (Ag) as defined in Section
B3.13a is used because this area is present in
all the member with the exception of the
connections
 Hence, the elongation ∆L = εLo becomes large
as Lo is essentially the whole length of the
tension member
 This is why yielding on the gross area is
considered to be an ultimate limit state

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 121

Yielding on Gross Area

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 122

61
Yielding on Gross Area

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 123

Yielding on Gross Area

From Solid Mechanics I:


P
σ= ⇒ P =σ A
A

In LRFD format:
P=φ Rn ; A = Ag and σ = φ Fy

∴φ Rn = φ Ag Fy ; φ = 0.90

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 124

62
Yielding on Gross Area
 The resistance factor φ = 0.90 because there
exists a reserve in load carrying capacity until
the tensile strength Fu is reached
 Hence, yielding is not as critical as rupture
 This ultimate limit state controls the behavior of
the tension member along its length, except in
the connections

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 125

Rupture on Effective Area

Reference: Kulak et al. (2002)

Reference: McGuire (1968)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 126

63
Rupture on Effective Area
From Solid Mechanics I:
P
σ= ⇒ P =σ A
A
Reference: Kulak et al. (2002)

In LRFD format:
P=φ Rn ; A = Ae and σ = φ Fu

φ Rn = φ Ae Fu ; φ = 0.75
Ae = effective area

Reference: McGuire (photo).

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 127

Rupture on Effective Area


 There is no load carrying
reserve capacity once Fu
Stress
Tensile Strength
Yield Stress

is reached
 Hence, fracture is more Elastic
Behavior
Strain Hardening Necking and

critical than yielding


failure
Plastic Flow

 Thus, φ = 0.75 to protect Strain

the tension member from


failure in a more critical
ultimate limit state

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 128

64
Rupture on Effective Area – Shear
Lag

Ae = UAn
Ae = effective area
U = shear lag reduction coefficient
A n = net area (after hole reductions)
A n is defined in Section B3.13a of the Manual

x
U = 1-
L

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 129

Shear Lag Reduction Coefficient


(bolted or welded steel shapes)
x
U = 1− Reference: Kulak et al. (2002)
L
x = connection eccentricity
L = length of the connection

This factor takes into account the fact that not


all of the elements of the cross section are
connected.
It does not apply when all the elements of the
cross section are connected (U=1)

Reference: McGuire (photo).

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 130

65
Shear Lag Coefficient

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 131

Net Area - Holes in Rectangular


Array
An = Ag − ∑ dt

1 ′′ 1 ′′
d = dh + = db + w
16 8 T

An = Ag − 2dt

 Σdt includes all the holes crossed by the net area

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 132

66
Net Area – Staggered Holes
s 2t
An = Ag − ∑ dt + ∑
4g
w g T
1 ′′ 1 ′′
d = dh + = db +
16 8
s 2t s
An = Ag − 2dt +
4g

 A correction term (s2t/4g) must be included per diagonal


 s = pitch
 g = gage

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 133

Block Shear Rupture


 It is a rupture type of failure
 It Includes two failure planes:
 One in tension.
 One in shear.
 Block shear rupture strength is not necessarily the direct sum of
the fracture strengths of each plane

From Solid Mechanics I:


P
σ= ⇒ P =σ A
A
V
τ= ⇒ V = τ Av
Av
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 134

67
Block Shear Rupture – Failure
Modes

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 135

Block Shear Rupture - Areas

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 136

68
Block Shear Rupture
 It is a rupture type of
failure
 It Includes two failure
planes:
 One in tension.
 One in shear.
 Block shear rupture
strength is not
necessarily the direct
sum of the fracture
strengths of each plane

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 137

Block Shear Rupture


 AISC Specifications are based on experimental tests
carried out at several universities including, but not
limited to:
 The University of Texas at Austin (Yura and Ricles)
 The University of Connecticut (Epstein)
 The University of Alberta (Kulak and Grondin). They
showed that the stress distribution in the tension plane is
not always uniform
 Hence the need to include a reduction factor Ubs to
approximate the non-uniform stress distribution on
the tension plane
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 138

69
Block Shear Rupture
 The strength by block shear rupture is given by the
following expression (AISC Specification, Chapter J):
φ Rnbs = φt [U bs Ant Fu + Anv Fuv ] ≤ φt U bs Ant Fu + Agv Fyv 
φt = 0.75
Ant = net area in tension
Agv = gross area in shear
Anv = net area in shear
Fu = tensile strength
Fyv = shear yield stress
Fuv = shear fracture stress
U bs = reduction factor due to tensile stress distribution
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 139

Shear Yielding and Fracture


Stresses
 To determine the shear yielding and fracture
stresses we must take into account these facts:
 Structural steel is a ductile material
 From Solid Mechanics II, we can use von Mises or
Tresca theories for ductile materials while Rankine’s
theory is applied to brittle materials
 Experimentally, von Mises’ theory better represents
the behavior of structural steel
 Use von Mises’ theory for structural steel

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 140

70
Taken from: Popov (1976).

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 141

Shear Yielding and Fracture


Stresses

1 2 2
σe =
2
(σ x − σ y ) + (σ y − σ z ) + (σ z − σ x ) + 6 (τ xy2 + τ yz2 + τ zx2 )
2

1 2 2 2
σe = (σ 1 − σ 2 ) + (σ 2 − σ 3 ) + (σ 3 − σ 1 )
2

For a state of pure shear:



σ 1 = +τ ; σ 2 = −τ ; σ 3 = 0 τ −τ
1
τ y = Fyv = Fy = 0.577 Fy ≈ 0.6 Fy
3
1
τ u = Fuv = Fu = 0.577 Fu ≈ 0.6 Fu
3
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 142

71
Block Shear Rupture Strength
 Based on the foregoing, the block shear rupture strength
is given by:

φ Rnbs = φt [U bs Ant Fu + 0.6 Anv Fu ] ≤ φt U bs Ant Fu + 0.6 Agv Fy 


φt = 0.75
Ant = net area in tension
Agv = gross area in shear
Anv = net area in shear
Fu = tensile strength
Fy = yield stress
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 143

Block Shear Rupture Strength


 Examples of different
cases of the reduction
factor applied to the
tensile stresses (Ubs) are
shown:
 Ubs = 1. for uniform tensile
stress distribution
 Ubs = 0.5 for non-uniform
tensile stress distribution

Ref.: AISC Manual, 13th Edition

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 144

72
Block Shear Rupture Strength

U bs = 1.0 U bs = 0.5

Ref.: Franchuk, Driver, and


Grondin

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 145

Block Shear Rupture Strength

Reference: Huns, Grondin, and Driver

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 146

73
Block Shear Rupture Strength

Reference: Huns, Grondin, and Driver

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 147

Block Shear Rupture Strength

Reference: Huns, Grondin, and Driver

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 148

74
Block Shear Rupture Strength

Reference: Huns, Grondin, and Driver

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 149

Block Shear Rupture Strength

Reference: Huns, Grondin, and Driver

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 150

75
Serviceability Limit States
 Vibration
To avoid annoying
 KL 

vibrations of tension

 ≤ 300
members the maximum
slenderness ratio of such 
members preferably should
not exceed 300
 r max
 This suggestion does not
apply to rods or hangers in
tension

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 151

SESSION 5

TENSION MEMBERS
EXAMPLE #1
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 152

76
Objectives
 At the end of this session the student should be
able to:
 Identify all of the limit states applicable to a tension
member
 Apply the specifications to determine the strength of a
tension member

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 153

Tension Members – Example 1


 Compute the maximum factored load that can be
applied to the tension member shown. Consider
all of the applicable limit states. ASTM A572
Grade 50 steel is used for the tension member
and the gusset plate is A36 steel. Holes are for
¾-inch bolts. The recommended minimum
distance between bolts in the same line,
measured in the direction of the load, is three
times the bolt diameter.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 154

77
Tension Members – Example 1

2"

Gusset plate of 0.375" A36 steel

C7x12.2; 50 ksi steel

2"

1.5" 3" 3" 1.5"

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 155

Solution – Cross Section Properties


Cross section properties (Pages 1-34 and 1-35)
Ag = 3.60 in 2
tw = 0.314 in
x = 0.525 in
Material properties (Table 2-3)
Channel section (A572-50):
Fy = 50 ksi; Fu = 65 ksi
Gusset plate (A36):
Fy = 36 ksi; Fu = 58 ksi
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 156

78
Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 157

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 158

79
Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 159

Strength of Channel Section


 Yielding φ Rn = φ Ag Fy
φ Rn = 0.90 × 3.60 × 50
φ Rn = 162 kips

 Rupture d = db + 1 8 = 3 4 + 1 8 = 7 8 in = 0.875 in
An = Ag − ∑ dt = 3.60 − 2 × 0.875 × 0.314 = 3.051 in 2
x 0.525
U = 1− = 1− = 0.913
L 6
Ae = UAn = 0.913 × 3.051 = 2.786 in 2
φ Rn = φ Ae Fu = 0.75 × 2.786 × 65 = 135.8 kips
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 160

80
Strength of Channel Section
 Block shear
rupture in
channel section Shear

Tension
3"

Shear

1.5" 3" 3" 1.5"

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 161

Strength of Channel Section

Shear

Tension
3"

Shear

1.5" 3" 3" 1.5"

Shear areas:
Agv = 2 × 7.5 × 0.314 = 4.710 in 2
Anv = 2 ( 7.5 − 2.5 × 0.875 )( 0.314 ) = 3.336 in 2
Net tension area:
Ant = ( 3 − 2 × 0.5 × 0.875 )( 0.314 ) = 0.667 in 2
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 162

81
Strength of Channel Section
 Block shear φ Rnbs = φ ( Anv 0.6 Fu + U bs Ant Fu ) ; U bs = 1
rupture φ Rnbs = 0.75 ( 3.336 × 0.6 × 65 + 1× 0.667 × 65 )
strength (note φ Rnbs = 130 kips
that other
options of block φ Rnbs ≤ φ ( Agv 0.6 Fy + U bs Ant Fu )
shear involving φ Rnbs ≤ 0.75 ( 4.710 × 0.6 × 50 + 1× 0.667 × 65 )
two and four
φ Rnbs ≤ 138.5 kips
bolts are
possible) ∴φ Rnbs = 130 kips

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 163

Strength of Gusset Plate


 Block Shear in
Gusset Plate
Shear

3" Tension

Shear

1.5" 3" 3"

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 164

82
Strength of Gusset Plate

Shear

3" Tension

Shear Shear areas:


1.5" 3" 3" Agv = 2 × 7.5 × 0.375 = 5.625 in 2
Anv = 2 ( 7.5 − 2.5 × 0.875 )( 0.375 ) = 3.984 in 2
Net tension area:
Ant = ( 3 − 2 × 0.5 × 0.875 )( 0.375 ) = 0.797 in 2
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 165

Strength of Gusset Plate


 Block shear φ Rnbs = φ ( Anv 0.6 Fu + U bs Ant Fu ) ; U bs = 1
rupture φ Rnbs = 0.75 ( 3.984 × 0.6 × 58 + 1× 0.797 × 58 )
strength (note φ Rnbs = 138.7 kips
that other
options of block φ Rnbs ≤ φ ( Agv 0.6 Fy + U bs Ant Fu )
shear involving φ Rnbs ≤ 0.75 ( 5.625 × 0.6 × 36 + 1× 0.797 × 58 )
two and four
φ Rnbs ≤ 125.8 kips
bolts are
possible) ∴φ Rnbs = 125.8 kips

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 166

83
Conclusion
 For the block shears considered in this example,
the maximum factored load that can be applied
to the tension member is 125.8 kips and is
governed by the block shear rupture strength of
the gusset plate

 Note that there are more possible block shears


and in order to give a complete answer to this
and any other problem, all the possibilities must
be investigated
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 167

SESSION 6

TENSION MEMBERS
EXAMPLE #2
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 168

84
Objectives
 At the end of this session the student should be
able to design a tension member taking into
account all of the applicable ultimate limit states

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 169

Tension Members – Example 2


 Design a tension member with the following
data:
 A992 steel.
 275 kips factored load.
 Use a double angle cross section.
 Bolts of 7/8 inch diameter.
 Use the AISC recommended gages.
 Assume the gusset plate is not critical.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 170

85
Tension Members – Example 2

1.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 distances are in inches

275 kips

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 171

Yielding of the Gross Section


Pu 275
Ag req ' d = = = 6.11 in 2
φ Fy ( 0.90 )( 50 )
Ag req ' d = 6.11 in 2 = 3.06 in 2 for each angle

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 172

86
Rupture Limit State
 The critical net area is not
necessarily the smalest
one but the one that is
subjected to the highest
tensile stress.

 Hence, the stress level


must be investigated in
cases where there are
several possibilities of net
areas

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 173

Possibilities for the Effective Area


1.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 distances are in inches

100% of Pu
275 kips

1.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 distances are in inches

6
×100% of Pu
275 kips 7

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 174

87
Other Possible Net Areas:
100% Pu

1.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 distances are in inches

275 kips

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 175

Other Possible Net Areas:


100% Pu

1.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 distances are in inches

275 kips

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 176

88
Other Possible Net Areas:
100% Pu

1.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 distances are in inches

275 kips

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 177

Other Possible Net Areas


 All of the areas with diagonal components are
not critical for this particular problem.
 Verify the statement above. Can you think of a
criterion to determine whether or not a net area
with diagonal(s) is not critical? Hint: look at the
correction term:
s 2t
4g
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 178

89
Rupture of the Effective Area:
100% Pu
1.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 distances are in inches

275 kips

Pu 275
Ae1req ' d = = = 5.64 in 2
φ Fu ( 0.75 )( 65)
U assumed = 0.85 (0.90 could also be used, as we will see)
5.64
A n1req'd = = 6.64 in 2 (or 6.27 in 2 ⇒ Ag > 6.11 in 2 )
0.85
A n1req'd = 3.32 in 2 for each angle
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 179

Rupture of the Effective Area:


(600/7)% Pu
1.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 distances are in inches

275 kips

6
  ( 275 )
Ae 2 =  
7
= 4.835 in 2
( )( 65 )
0.75
U assumed = 0.85 (0.90 could also be used, as we will see)
4.84
A n2req'd = = 5.69 in 2 (or 5.38 in 2 )
0.85
A n2req'd = 2.85 in 2 for each angle
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 180

90
Required Gross Area:
1
d = dbolt + = 1.00 in
8

For 100% of Pu :
Ag1 = An1 + dt = 3.32 + t

For 85.7% of Pu :
Ag 2 = 2.85 + 2dt = 2.85 + 2t
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 181

Required Gross Area for Rupture


t Ag1 Ag2 Shape Ag x U
(in) (in2) (in2) (in2) (in)
5/16 3.63 3.48 L6x6 3.67 1.60 0.82

3/8 3.70 3.60 L7x4 3.98 0.861 0.90

7/16 3.76 3.73 L6x4 4.18 0.957 0.89

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 182

91
Rupture of the Effective Area
 From the results of the previous table, we conclude that
fracture controls over yielding.
 Note that two lines of bolts should be used. So, the
angle’s connected leg should be of at least 5 inches long
(see Table 1-7 of the AISC Manual, 2005)
 Select L7x4x3/8

Reference: AISC Manual


JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 183

Reference: AISC Manual


JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 184

92
Reference: AISC Manual
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 185

Workable Gages in Angle Legs

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 186

93
Rupture of the Effective Area
 If the ruture takes place in a section where the axial
force comes from Nr of the Nb bolts of the connection,
the strength by rupture is obtained using the following
equation:

Nb
φ Rn = (φ Rn )computed
Nr
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 187

Block Shear Revisions


 First possibility (600/7)% Pu

1.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 distances are in inches

275 kips
4.5 in

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 188

94
Block Shear Revisions
1.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 distances are in inches

275 kips
4.5 in

Ant = ( 4.5 − 1.5)( 3 8 ) = 1.125


Anv = ( 7.5 − 2.5)( 3 8 ) = 1.875
Agv = ( 7.5 )( 3 8 ) = 2.813
φ Rnbs = φ (U bs Ant Fu + 0.6 Anv Fu ) ≤ φ (U bs Ant Fu + 0.6 Agv Fy )
U bs = 1.00
φ Rnbs = ( 0.75 ) (1)(1.125 )( 65 ) + ( 0.6 )(1.875 )( 65 )
φ Rnbs = 109.7 kips ≤ ( 0.75 ) (1)(1.125)( 65) + ( 0.6 )( 2.813)( 50 )  = 118.1 kips
φ Rnbs = 109.7 kips
7
φ Rn = ( 2 )   (109.7 ) = 255.9 kips < Pu
 
6

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 189

Block Shear Revisions


 Since block shear rupture is a local failure, before
increasing the size of the shape we should try to look at
the possibility of increasing the dimensions of the block
shear (only the shear plane in this case)

By shear rupture (because rupture is controlling):


275-255.9 6
∆L= × = 0.75 in
( 0.75)( 0.6 )( 65)( 0.375)( 2 ) 7
Hence, increase the length of the shear plane to
Lv = 7.5 + .75 = 8.25 in

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 190

95
Block Shear Revisions
 If the length of the shear plane is increased to 8.25 in. the
block shear strength will be as follows. The 7/6 factor is
because the block shear involves 6 of the 7 bolts:
Ant = ( 4.5 − 1.5 )( 3 8 ) = 1.125
Anv = ( 8.25 − 2.5 )( 3 8 ) = 2.156
Agv = ( 8.25 )( 3 8 ) = 3.094
φ Rnbs = φ (U bs Ant Fu + 0.6 Anv Fu ) ≤ φ (U bs Ant Fu + 0.6 Agv Fy )
U bs = 1.00
φ Rnbs = ( 0.75 ) (1)(1.125)( 65 ) + ( 0.6 )( 2.156 )( 65 ) 
φ Rnbs = 117.9 kips ≤ ( 0.75 ) (1)(1.125 )( 65) + ( 0.6 )( 3.094 )( 50 )  = 124.5 kips
φ Rnbs = 117.9 kips
7
φ Rn = ( 2 )   (117.9 ) = 275.1 kips > Pu
 
6
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 191

Block Shear Revisions


 Second possibility

1.5 3.375 3.375 3.0 distances are in inches

275 kips
4.5 in

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 192

96
Block Shear Revisions
1.5 3.375 3.375 3.0 distances are in inches

275 kips
4.5 in

 32 
Ant =  4.5 − 1.5 +  ( 3 8 ) = 1.688
 4 ×1.5 
Anv = ( 8.25 − 2.5 )( 3 8 ) = 2.156
Agv = ( 8.25 )( 3 8 ) = 3.094
φ Rnbs = φ (U bs Ant Fu + 0.6 Anv Fu ) ≤ φ (U bs Ant Fu + 0.6 Agv Fy )
U bs = 1.00
φ Rnbs = ( 0.75 ) (1)(1.688)( 65) + ( 0.6 )( 2.156 )( 65) 
φ Rnbs = 145.4 kips ≤ ( 0.75) (1)(1.688)( 65) + ( 0.6 )( 3.094 )( 50 )  = 151.9 kips
φ Rnbs = 145.4 kips
φ Rn = ( 2 )(145.4 ) = 290.7 kips > Pu

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 193

Block Shear Revisions


 Third possibility

1.5 3.375 3.375 3.0 distances are in inches

275 kips
4.5 in

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 194

97
Block Shear Revisions
1.5 3.375 3.375 3.0 distances are in inches

275 kips
4.5 in

Ant = ( 4.5 − 1.5 )( 3 8 ) = 1.125


Anv = ( 4.875 − 1.5 )( 3 8 ) = 1.266
Agv = ( 4.875 )( 3 8 ) = 1.828
φ Rnbs = φ (U bs Ant Fu + 0.6 Anv Fu ) ≤ φ (U bs Ant Fu + 0.6 Agv Fy )
U bs = 1.00
φ Rnbs = ( 0.75 ) (1)(1.125 )( 65 ) + ( 0.6 )(1.266 )( 65 )
φ Rnbs = 91.87 kips ≤ ( 0.75 ) (1)(1.125 )( 65 ) + ( 0.6 )(1.828 )( 50 ) = 95.97 kips
φ Rnbs = 91.87 kips
7
φ Rn = ( 2 )   ( 91.87 ) = 321.6 kips > Pu
 
4
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 195

Conclusion
 Use 2L7x4x3/8 provided the length of the shear
plane is increased in at least ¾ in
 Assignment :
 Select the lightest L-shape for the tension member
assuming that it is not possible to increase the length
of the connection
 For this particular problem, check all the possibilities
for block shear rupture

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 196

98
Block Shear Rupture Strength
 If the block shear failure takes place in a block section
where the axial force comes from Nbs of the Nb bolts of
the connection, the strength by rupture is obtained using
the following equation:

Nb
φ Rn = (φ Rnbs )computed
N bs
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 197

MODULE #3
DESIGN OF SIMPLE
CONNECTIONS:

a) Welded Connections
b) Bolted Connections
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 198

99
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 199

What Will You Gain From This


Presentation?
 General knowledge of structural steel

 An understanding of the different ways that structural steel is connected

 Insight into types of bolts and their installation

 An awareness of types of bolted joints used for structural steel

 Knowledge of welding terminology, weld types, and welding processes

 Familiarity with common weld inspection methods and considerations


associated with field welding

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 200

100
Benefits of Structural Steel

Some benefits associated with use of structural steel for owners are:
• Steel allows for reduced frame construction time and the ability to construct in all
seasons
• Steel makes large spans and bay sizes possible, providing more flexibility for owners
• Steel is easier to modify and reinforce if architectural changes are made to a facility
over its life
• Steel is lightweight and can reduce foundation costs
• Steel is durable, long-lasting and recyclable (AISC 1999)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 201

Unique Aspects of Steel Construction

Procurement and management of structural steel is similar to other materials, but there
are some unique aspects to steel construction:
• Steel is fabricated off-site (above left)
• On-site erection is a rapid process (above right)
• This gives use of structural steel some scheduling advantages
• Coordination of all parties is essential for achieving potential advantages
(AISC 1999)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 202

101
Connecting Structural Steel

• The primary connection methods for structural steel are bolting and welding
• A structure’s strength depends on proper use of these connection methods
• Connections made in a fabrication shop are called shop connections
• Connections made in the field by the steel erector are called field connections
• Bolting and welding may be used for shop connections and field connections
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 203

Connecting Structural Steel

• A fabrication shop will have a desired fastening method suited to its equipment and
fabrication methods
• Field connections are typically bolted
• Welding may be used for field connections where bolting is either impractical or
undesirable
• Welding is better suited to the controlled environment of a fabrication shop
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 204

102
WELDING

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 205

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 206

103
Structural Welding

• A common method for connecting structural steel is welding


• Welding can be performed in the shop or in the field
• Many fabrication shops prefer to weld rather than bolt
• Welding in the field is avoided if possible due to welding condition requirements
• There are several welding processes, types, and positions to be considered in
building construction
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 207

Structural Welding

• The American Welding Society (AWS) is a nonprofit organization with a goal to


advance the science, technology and application of welding and related joining
disciplines
• AWS develops codes, recommended practices, and guides under strict
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) procedures
• D1.1 Structural Welding Code – Steel, one of the most consulted codes in the
world, is produced by AWS (AWS 2004a)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 208

104
Structural Welding

• Welding is the process of fusing multiple pieces of metal together by heating


the filler metal to a liquid state
• A properly welded joint is stronger than the base metal
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 209

Strength of Structural Welds

(Part of Table J2.5 AISC 2005)


• Welds may be loaded in shear, tension, compression, or a combination of these
• Capacities for welds are given in the AISC Specification Section J2 (2005)
• The strength of a weld is dependent on multiple factors, including: base metal,
filler metal, type of weld, throat and weld size
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 210

105
Welding Terminology

• Tack Weld (above left): A temporary weld used to hold parts in place while more
extensive, final welds are made
• Continuous Weld: A weld which extends continuously from one end of a joint to
the other
• Stitch Weld (above right): A series of welds of a specified length that are spaced
a specified distance from each other

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 211

Welding Terminology

Butt
Lap Corner

Edge
Tee

• Shown above are types of structural joints which are established by positions of
the connected material relative to one another
• Lap, tee, and butt joints are most common (AISC)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 212

106
Welding Terminology

Fillet Full penetration Partial penetration


single bevel single bevel
groove weld groove weld

Full penetration Partial penetration


Plug double vee single J groove
groove weld weld
• Weld types define the configuration of the weld and its underlying design approach
• Fillet welds and groove welds are most common
• Groove welds fall into two categories
 Full penetration – the entire member cross-section is welded
 Partial penetration – just part of the member cross-section is welded
(AISC)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 213

Fillet Welds

Symbolic Profiles

Actual Profiles

• The most commonly used weld is the fillet weld


• Fillet welds are theoretically triangular in cross-section
• Fillet welds join two surfaces at approximately right angles to each other in
lap, tee, and corner joints
(AISC & NISD 2000)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 214

107
Groove Welds

• Groove welds are specified when a fillet weld is not appropriate for the job
 The configuration of the pieces may not permit fillet welding
 A strength greater than that provided by a fillet weld is required
• Groove welds are made in the space or groove between the two pieces being welded
(AISC & NISD 2000)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 215

Full Penetration Groove Welds

• The bevel or “J” preparation extends over most of or the entire face of the material being
joined
• Complete fusion takes place
• In some types of full penetration groove welds the material will be beveled from one side
of the plate with a separate plate on the opposite side – called backing or a backing bar
(AISC & NISD 2000)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 216

108
Partial Penetration Groove Welds

Partial joint penetration welds are used when it is not necessary for the strength of the joint to
develop the full cross section of the members being joined
(AISC & NISD 2000)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 217

Welding Positions

• There are four recognized welding positions:


 Flat: The face of the weld is approximately horizontal and welding is performed from
above the joint
 Horizontal: The axis of the weld is horizontal
 Vertical: The axis is approximately vertical or in the upright position
 Overhead: Welding is performed from below the joint
• The flat position is preferred because it is easier and more efficient to weld in this position
(AISC & NISD 2000)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 218

109
Weld Symbols
• Weld symbols are used to
communicate the specific
details and requirements
of each weld to the welder
• Weld symbols are
included on fabrication
and erection drawings

Horizontal Weld Line

Field Weld Symbol Tail


Note
(Indicating this is a
typical weld)
Leader Line

Length and Spacing of weld


(In Inches)
Size of weld
(In Inches) Basic Weld Symbol
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 219
(Fillet weld symbol shown)

Weld Size

• The size of a weld must match the size specified on the drawings
• Some welds may meet the required size after a single pass of the welder
• Larger weld sizes may require multiple passes to meet the size requirement
• Common single pass welds include fillet welds up to and including 5/16 inch and thin
plate butt welds with no preparation
• Common multiple pass welds include single bevel full penetration groove welds, single
bevel partial penetration groove welds, and fillet welds over 5/16 inch
• The weld in the above picture is a multiple pass fillet weld
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 220

110
Weld Accessibility
• Access holes are required for
some welds, such as the welded
flange connection shown to the Extension Bar
right
 The top access hole allows
for a continuous backing
bar to be placed under the
top flange Backing Bar

Column
 The bottom access hole Weld Access
allows for complete access Holes
to weld the entire width of
the bottom flange
• A detail of a weld access hole
for a welded flange connection
is shown below

Seat Angle

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 221

(Adapted from AISC 2002a) (Adapted from AISC 2001)

SMAW Welding

• Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW) is also known as manual, stick, or hand welding
• An electric arc is produced between the end of a coated metal electrode and the steel
components to be welded
• The electrode is a filler metal covered with a coating
• The electrode’s coating has two purposes:
• It forms a gas shield to prevent impurities in the atmosphere from getting into the
weld
• It contains a flux that purifies the molten metal (AISC & NISD 2000)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 222

111
GMAW Welding

• Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW) is also known as MIG welding


• It is fast and economical
• A continuous wire is fed into the welding gun
• The wire melts and combines with the base metal to form the weld
• The molten metal is protected from the atmosphere by a gas shield which is fed through a
conduit to the tip of the welding gun
• This process may be automated (AISC & NISD 2000)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 223

FCAW Welding

• Flux Cored Arc Welding (FCAW) is similar to the GMAW process


• The difference is that the filler wire has a center core which contains flux
• With this process it is possible to weld with or without a shielding gas
 This makes it useful for exposed conditions where a shielding gas may be affected
by the wind
(AISC & NISD 2000)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 224

112
SAW Welding

• Submerged Arc Welding (SAW) is only performed by automatic or semiautomatic


methods
• Uses a continuously fed filler metal electrode
• The weld pool is protected from the surrounding atmosphere by a blanket of granular flux
fed at the welding gun
• Results in a deeper weld penetration than the other process
• Only flat or horizontal positions may be used (AISC & NISD 2000)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 225

Welding Equipment

• Equipment used for welding will vary depending on the welding process and whether the
welding is being done in the shop or in the field
• A Flux Cored Arc Welding machine for shop welding is pictured above left
• A Shielded Metal Arc Welding machine for field welding is pictured above right
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 226

113
Weather Impacts on Welding

• Welding in the field is avoided if possible due to welding condition requirements


• Field welding is not to be performed while it is raining, snowing, or below 0°F
• In certain ambient temperatures preheating of the material to be welded is required
• AWS Code D1.1 (2004b) specifies minimum preheat and interpass temperatures, which
are designed to prevent cracking
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 227

Welding Safety

• It is important for both the welder and those working in the area around a welding process
to be safety conscious
• The welding arc should never be looked at with the naked eye
• AWS publishes many safety and health fact sheets which are available for download at
their web site: www.aws.org
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 228

114
Welding Safety

A welder should wear the proper protective gear including:


• Helmet • Heavy fabric or leather shirt
• Face shield or goggles • Cuffless pants
• Gloves • Leather leggings
• Boots
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 229

Welding in Existing Structures

Welding to existing structures during retrofit projects requires careful consideration


of numerous factors:
• Determine weldability – Identify the steel grade to establish a welding procedure
• Select and design the weld – Fillet welds are preferred and avoid over welding
• Surface preparation – Remove contaminants such as paint, oil, and grease
• Loads during retrofit – An engineer should determine the extent to which a member will
be permitted to carry loads while heating, welding, or cutting
• Fire hazards – Follow all governing fire codes, regulations, and safety rules to avoid fires
• For complete details see the AISC Rehabilitation and Retrofit Guide (2002b)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 230

115
Weld Inspections

• In addition to the erector’s quality control program, tests and inspections are specified by
the Engineer of Record and/or the local building authority
• A local building inspector may request that tests in addition to those specified by the
Engineer of Record be performed
• Some problems that can be found in welds include:
 Lack of fusion  Cracks  Wrong size
 Porosity  Insufficient penetration  Poor workmanship
• There are several weld tests and inspections that are commonly used
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 231

Visual Inspection

• Visual inspection is the most frequently used inspection and is the only inspection
required unless the specification calls for a more stringent inspection method
• Inspection is done by the welder before, during, and after welding
• When outside inspection is required it should also be done before, during, and after
welding
• Minor problems can be identified and corrected before the weld is complete
(AISC & NISD 2000)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 232

116
Dye Penetrant Test

• Dye penetrant testing locates minute surface cracks and porosity


• Dye types that may be used include:
 Color contrast dye - which shows up under ordinary light
 Fluorescent dye – which shows up under black light
• The dye is normally applied by spraying it directly on the weld
(AISC & NISD 2000)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 233

Magnetic Particle Inspection

• Magnetic particle inspection uses powdered magnetic particles to indicate defects in


magnetic materials
• A magnetic field is induced in the part
• The magnetic powder is attracted to and outlines cracks within the material
(AISC & NISD 2000)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 234

117
Ultrasonic Inspection

• Ultrasonic inspection can be used to detect flaws inside welds


• High frequency sound waves are directed into the metal with a probe held at a specific
angle
• The flaws reflect some energy back to the probe
• Flaws show up as indications on a screen (above) and are subject to interpretation by an
inspector
(AISC & NISD 2000)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 235

Radiographic Inspection

• Radiographic inspection, or X-ray, can also be used to detect flaws inside welds
• Invisible rays penetrate the metal and reveal flaws on an x-ray film or fluorescent screen
(above)
• This is the most costly of the inspection methods
(AISC & NISD 2000)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 236

118
Welding Cost Considerations

• Fillet weld is less expensive than groove weld


 No special preparation
 No backing required
 Less volume of weld
• Partial penetration groove weld is less expensive than full penetration
groove weld
• Labor represents the majority of the cost associated with welding
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 237

References

AISC. (n.d.). Steel Connections: Behavior and Practice [35mm Slide Show with Script]. American Institute of
Steel Construction, Inc. Chicago, IL.
AISC. (2001). LRFD Manual of Steel Construction, Third Edition. American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.
Chicago, IL.
AISC. (2002a). Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings. American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.
Chicago, IL.
AISC. (2002b). Design Guide 15 – AISC Rehabilitation and Retrofit Guide. American Institute of Steel
Construction, Inc. Chicago, IL.
AISC. (2003). High Strength Bolts: A Primer for Structural Engineers. American Institute of Steel Construction,
Inc. Chicago, IL.
AISC & NISD. (2000). Detailer Training Series [CD-ROM set]. American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. and
National Institute of Steel Detailing. Chicago, IL. (Available from AISC, One East Wacker Drive, Suite
3100, Chicago, IL 60601).
American Welding Society, (AWS). (2004a). American Welding Society Web Site. Available at:
http://www.aws.org/. Viewed August, 2004.
American Welding Society, (AWS). (2004b). “Structural Welding Code.” ANSI/AWS D1.1-2004, Miami, FL.
Green, P. S., Sputo, T., and Veltri, P. (n.d.). Connections Teaching Toolkit – A Teaching Guide for Structural
Steel Connections. American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. Chicago, IL.
Research Council on Structural Connections, (RCSC). (2000). Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM
A325 or A490 Bolts. American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. Chicago, IL.
Ruby, D.I. (2003) . “All About Bolts.” AISC Modern Steel Construction, May.
SSTC. (2001). Structural Bolting Handbook. Steel Structures Technology Center, Inc. Novi, MI.
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 238

119
SESSION 7

SIMPLE WELDED
CONNECTIONS
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 239

Types of Welded Connections

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 240

120
Welding Processes
 Shielded-metal-arc
 Electrode coating creates a gaseous shield that
protects the molten weld metal from the atmosphere
(field weld)
 Submerged-arc
 Arc occurs underneath a previously deposited fusible
powdered flux that blankets the welding zone (shop
weld)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 241

Advantages of Welding
 Simplicity of design details, efficiency, and
minimum weight are achieved because welding
provides the most direct transfer of stress from
one member to another.
 Fabrication costs are reduced because fewer
parts are handled and operations such as
punching, reaming and drilling are eliminated.
 Saving in weight in main tension members since
there is no reduction in area due to rivet or bolt
holes. Additional saving is also achieved
because of the fewer connecting parts required.
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 242

121
Advantages of Welding
 Welding provides the only plate-joining
procedure that is inherently air- and watertight
and hence is ideal for water and oil storage
tanks, ships, and so forth.
 Welding permits the use of fluidly changing lines
that enhance the structural and arquitectural
appearance, as well as reduce stress
concentrations due to local discontinuities.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 243

Advantages of Welding
 Simple fabrication becomes practicable for those
joints in which a member is joined to a curved or
sloping surface, such as structural pipe
connections.
 Welding simplifies the strengthening and repair
of existing riveted or welded structures.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 244

122
Welding Symbols
 In the next slide the different weld symbols are
shown.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 245

Reference: Salmon, Johnson, and Malhas.


JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 246

123
Reference: Salmon, Johnson, and Malhas.
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 247

Fillet Weld Design


 Fillet welds account for more than 80% of the
welds in a structure
 Specifications for design are in Chapter J,
Section 2 of the AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 248

124
Fillet Weld Design
 Failure modes:
 Fracture of the weld metal along the throat plane (Plane 2-2 in
AISC-LRFD Page 339)
 Fracture of the base metal near the fusion plane (Planes 1-1 or
3-3 in AISC-LRFD Page 339)
 Block shear rupture of the base metal (if applicable)

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 249

Fillet Welds in Longitudinal Shear


 Critical shear planes for fillet welds loaded in longitudinal
shear (AISC Manual, Commentary to Chapter J, page
339).

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 250

125
Fillet Welds in Longitudinal Shear

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 251

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 252

126
Strength of Fillet Welds

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 253

Fillet Weld Failure Modes


 Fracture of the weld metal along the throat plane (Plane 2-2 )

φ Rnw = φ 0.707 S w 0.60 FEXX


S w = weld size
φ = 0.75
Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 254

127
Fillet Weld Failure Modes
 Fracture of the base metal near the fusion plane (Planes 1-1 or 3-3)

φ Rnw = φ t 0.6 Fu
t = thickness of base metal
φ = 0.75
Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 255

Fillet Weld Failure Modes


 Yielding of the base metal near the fusion plane (Planes 1-1 or 3-3)

φ Rnw = φ t 0.6 Fy
t = thickness of base metal
φ = 1.00 Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 256

128
Variation of Fillet Weld Strength

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 257

Variation of Fillet Weld Strength


θ = 0°: weld in shear
θ = 90°: weld in tension

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 258

129
Variation of Fillet Weld Strength

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 259

Variation of Fillet Weld Strength

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 260

130
Possible Deffects in Welds
 Incomplete fusion

 Inadequate joint
penetration

Reference: Salmon, Johnson, and Malhas

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 261

Possible Deffects in Welds


 Porosity

 Undercutting

Reference: Salmon, Johnson, and Malhas

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 262

131
Possible Deffects in Welds
 Slag inclusions

 Cracks

Reference: Salmon, Johnson, and Malhas

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 263

Minimum Size of Fillet Welds

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 264

132
Effect of Thickness on Cooling
Rate

Reference: Salmon, Johnson, and Malhas

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 265

Maximum Size of Fillet Welds

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 266

133
Maximum Weld Size

Reference: Salmon, Johnson, and Malhas

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 267

Measuring of Weld Size

Reference: Salmon, Johnson, and Malhas

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 268

134
Example of Welded Connection
 Design a single angle tension member to resist 40 kips
dead load and 20 kips live load and its welded
connection to an A36 gusset plate
 Use E70 electrodes

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 269

Example of Welded Connection


Fy := 36 × ksi Fu := 58 × ksi Required gross area by rupture on the efective area:
Pu 2
φ yt := 0.9 φ r := 0.75 φ ys := 1.0 A e := A e = 1.839 × in
φ r × Fu
FE70 := 70 × ksi

Assumed value for the shear lag reduction coefficient Ae 2


A n := A n = 2.164 × in
U
U := 0.85
Since there are no holes, the net area is the same as the gross area
PD := 40 × kip
A gr := A n
PL := 20 × kip
2
(
A gcrit := max A gy , A gr ) A gcrit = 2.469 × in
Pu := 1.2 × PD + 1.6 × PL
Based on the required gross area, an L5x3.5x5/16 is selected
Pu = 80 × kip
Required gross area by yielding on the gross area: 2
A greal := 2.57 × in
Pu 2
A gy := A gy = 2.469 × in
φ yt × Fy xbar := 0.829 × in
Ls := 5 × in

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 270

135
Example of Welded Connection
Design of the fillet welds: By rupture in the base metal:

φR nw2 := φ r × t × 0.6 × Fu
t :=  
5
 × in kip
 16  φR nw2 = 8.156 ×
in
Swmin :=   × in
3
By yielding in the base metal:
16  

Swmax:= t −   × in
1 φR nw3 := φ ys × t × 0.6 × Fy
 16 
kip
φR nw3 = 6.75 ×
Sw := Swmin in
kip
By rupture on the throat plane: (
φR nw := min φR nw1 , φR nw2 , φR nw3 ) φR nw = 4.176 ×
in

φR nw1 := φ r × 0.707 × Sw × 0.6 × FE70 The required length of the weld is given by:
kip Pu
φR nw1 = 4.176 × Lweld := Lweld = 19.158× in
in φR nw

Use two lines of


Lw := 10 × in

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 271

Example of Welded Connection


We now proceed to check block shear rupture strength on the gusset plate

10 in
xbar
U calc := 1 −
Lw

U calc = 0.917
5 in
Since U=0.917>the assumed value of 0.85, the strength is OK

φR n := 2 × Lw × φR nw

φR n = 83.514 × kip

t pl := .375 in U bs := 1.0
2
A nt := Ls × t pl A nt = 1.875 × in

A nv := 2 × Lw × t pl
2
A nv = 7.5 × in

A gv := 2 × Lw × t pl

2
A gv = 7.5 × in
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE
φR NUNGARAY PÉREZ =272
:= φ × U × A ( × F + 0.6 × A × F ) φR 277.313 ×

136
Example of Welded Connection
(
φR nbs1 := φ r × U bs × A nt × F u + 0.6 × A nv × F u ) φR nbs1 = 277.313 × kip

(
φR nbs2 := φ r × U bs × A nt × F u + 0.6 × A gv × F y ) φR nbs2 = 203.063 × kip

(
φR nbs := min φR nbs1 , φR nbs2 )
φR nbs = 203.063 × kip
It is evident that block shear rupture of the gusset plate is not a critical ultimate limit state
Another design check is based on the strength of the gusset plate calculated based on the Whitmore Section

b w := Ls + 2 × Lw × tan  
π

6 
b w = 16.547 × in
A w := b w × t pl

2
A w = 6.205 × in

Yielding on the Whitmore Section:


φR nyw := φ yt × A w × F y

φR nyw = 201.046 × kip

Rupture on the Whitmore Section:


φR nrw := φ r × A w × F u

φR nrw = 269.923 × kip

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 273

Whitmore Section
 A Whitmore section identifies a theoretically effective
cross-sectional area at the end of a connection resisting
tension or compression, such as that from a brace-to-
gusset-plate connection or similar fitting.

 As illustrated in the figure, the effective length for the


Whitmore section Lw is determined using a spread-out
angle of 30°along both sides of the connection,
beginning at the start of the connection.

 It is applicable to both welded and bolted connections.


JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 274

137
Whitmore Section
 Sometimes the Whitmore section "spills" over the
boundaries of the connected elements as shown in the
attached figure.

 If a "block shear" concept (see "Analytical Models for


Steel Connections" by Ralph M. Richard, Behavior of
Metal Structures, Proceedings of the W.H. Munse
Symposium, ASCE, pp. 128-155, 1983) is used as
shown rather than the Whitmore section, this apparent
dilemma is then circumvented with identical computed
load results.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 275

Whitmore Section

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 276

138
Whitmore Section

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 277

Whitmore Section

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 278

139
Example of Welded Connection
 Conclusion:
 Use an L5x3.5x5/16 in A36 steel
 Use 3/16 in. Sw E70 electrodes and a 20 in. weld
length in two lines of 10 in. each
 The load carrying capacity is 83.26 kips controlled by
yielding on the gross area of the L-shape

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 279

SESSION 8

WELD BALANCE

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 280

140
Weld Balancing
 When the member is subjected to cyclic loads
the additional bending stresses due to the
eccentricity of the load may lead to a fatigue
type of failure
 In these cases the designer must minimize the
eccentricity of the load by making the resultant
force in the welds coincide with the centroid of
the member

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 281

Weld Balancing
 Example. Design the fillet welds for the example
of the previous session minimizing the
eccentricity
 Note: the design process up to the calculation of
the required weld length goes exactly the same
as before, the only difference lies in the way in
which the weld is distributed

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 282

141
Weld Balancing
F1

y y

F2

∑ ( Moments ) bottom
=0 ∑ ( Forces ) horizontal
=0
F1 L − Pu ( L − y ) = 0 F1 + F2 = Pu
Pu ( L − y )
F1 = F2 = Pu − F1
L
F1 F2
Lw1 = Lw 2 =
φRnw φRnw
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 283

Weld Balancing
∑ ( Moments ) bottom
=0 ∑ ( Moments ) bottom
=0
F1 L − Pu ( L − y ) = 0 5 F1 − 80 ( 5 − 1.57 ) = 0
Pu ( L − y ) 80 ( 5 − 1.57 )
F1 = F1 = = 54.88 kips
L 5
∑ ( Forces )horizontal = 0 ∑ ( Forces )horizontal = 0
F1 + F2 = Pu
F1 + F2 = Pu
F2 = Pu − F1
F2 = 80 − 54.88 = 25.12 kips
F1
Lw1 = F1 54.88
φRnw Lw1 = = = 13.14 in → 13.50 in
φRnw 4.176
F2
Lw 2 = F2 25.12
φRnw Lw 2 = = = 6.02 in → 6.50 in
φRnw 4.176

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 284

142
Weld Balancing
F1

1.57 in

L5x3.5x5/16
80 kips

F2

13.50 in

… Do the calculations for end weld also


6.50 in

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 285

BOLTING

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 286

143
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 287

Structural Bolting

• The Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC) prepares specifications and


documents related to structural connections
• RCSC’s Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts (2000) is a
widely used specification which discusses joints, fasteners, limit states, installation, and
inspections
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 288

144
Structural Bolting

• During hoisting, connectors will install a minimum of two bolts per connection
• The rest of the bolts are installed and tightened after the structure is plumbed
• A systematic pattern must be followed when tightening bolts so that a joint is drawn
together and all fasteners are properly installed
(SSTC 2001)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 289

Structural Bolting

Per the Occupational Safety & Health Administration Standard 1926.754(b)(2), “At no time
shall there be more than four floors or 48 feet (14.6 m), whichever is less, of unfinished
bolting or welding above the foundation or uppermost permanently secured floor, except
where the structural integrity is maintained as a result of the design.”
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 290

145
Structural Bolting

(AISC & NISD 2000)


• There are many bolt types, installation methods, and joint types used in structural
steel construction
• When left exposed, bolts may be used to make an architectural expression
(Green, Sputo, and Veltri)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 291

ASTM Bolt Types

(AISC & NISD 2000)

• A307 – Low carbon steel


 Not commonly used
 Only used for secondary members
• A325 – High-strength medium carbon steel (above left)
 Most common bolts used in building construction
• A490 – High-strength heat treated steel (above right)
 Cost more than A325’s, but are stronger so fewer bolts may be necessary
• Note that the ASTM designation is indicated on the head of the bolts above
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 292

146
Common Bolt Sizes

• A325 and A490 bolts are available in diameters ranging from 1/2” to 1-1/2”
• The most common sizes are 3/4”, 7/8”, and 1”
• High-strength bolts are commonly available in incremental lengths up to 8”
(AISC)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 293

Washers

• Hardened steel washers are used in many structural connections to spread pressure from
the bolt tightening process over a larger area
• Washers may also be used to cover an oversized or slotted hole (RCSC 2000)
• Flat washers are most commonly used
• Tapered washers (above left) are used when the surface being bolted has a sloped
surface, such as the flange of a channel or an S shape
• A325 bolts require a washer under the element (head or nut) being turned to tighten the
bolt (shown under the nut, above right)
• A490 bolts require a washer under both the head and nut (AISC & NISD 2000)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 294

147
Parts of the Bolt Assembly
Grip Washer
Washer Nut
Face

Shank Thread
Head
Length

• Grip is the distance from behind the bolt head to the back of the nut or washer
 It is the sum of the thicknesses of all the parts being joined exclusive of washers
• Thread length is the threaded portion of the bolt
• Bolt length is the distance from behind the bolt head to the end of the bolt
(AISC & NISD 2000)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 295

Bolted Joint Types

• There two basic bolted joint types:


 Bearing
o The load is transferred between members by bearing on the bolts
 Slip-critical
o The load is transferred between members by friction in the joint
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 296

148
Bolted Joint Failure Modes

Bearing Bearing Bearing


Yield Fracture Fracture

Bearing
Yield
• Bolts in bearing joints are designed to meet two limit states:
1. Yielding, which is an inelastic deformation (above left)
2. Fracture, which is a failure of the joint (above left)
• The material the bolt bears against is also subject to yielding or fracture if it is undersized
for the load (above right)
• Tension connections act similarly to bearing connections
 Many times, connections in direct tension are reconfigured so that the bolts act in
shear (AISC)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 297

Bearing Joints

• In a bearing joint the connected elements are assumed to slip into bearing against the
body of the bolt
• If the joint is designed as a bearing joint the load is transferred through bearing whether
the bolt is installed snug-tight or pretensioned (AISC)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 298

149
Threads in the Shear Plane
• The shear plane is the plane
between two or more pieces N-bolts
under load where the pieces Fuv = 0.4Fu
tend to move parallel from each
other, but in opposite directions
• The threads of a bolt may either
be included in the shear plane
or excluded from the shear
plane Threads Included In The Shear Plane
• The capacity of a bolt is greater
with the threads excluded from
the shear plane X-bolts
Fuv = 0.5Fu
• The most commonly used bolt
is an ASTM A325 3/4” bolt with
the threads included in the
shear plane
(AISC & NISD 2000)

Threads Excluded From The Shear Plane


JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 299

Slip-Critical Joints

• In a slip-critical joint the bolts must be fully pretensioned to cause a clamping force
between the connected elements
• This force develops frictional resistance between the connected elements
• The frictional resistance allows the joint to withstand loading without slipping into bearing
against the body of the bolt, although the bolts must still be designed for bearing
• The faying surfaces in slip-critical joints require special preparation (AISC)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 300

150
When to Use Slip-Critical Joints

Per the RCSC Specification (2000), Slip-critical joints are only required in the following
applications involving shear or combined shear and tension:
1. Joints that are subject to fatigue load with reversal of the loading direction (not applicable
to wind bracing)
2. Joints that utilize oversized holes
3. Joints that utilize slotted holes, except those with applied load approximately
perpendicular to the direction of the long dimension of the slot
4. Joints in which slip at the faying surfaces would be detrimental to the performance of the
structure
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 301

Snug-tight Installation

Snug-tight is the tightness attained with a few hits of an impact wrench or the full effort of an
ironworker using an ordinary spud wrench to bring the connected plies into firm contact
(RCSC 2000)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 302

151
Bolting Methods
 Turn of the nut

 Calibrated wrench

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 303

Bolting Methods
 Twist – off bolts

 Direct tension
indicator

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 304

152
Turn-of-Nut Installation

• Installation beyond snug-tight is called pretensioning


• Turn-of-nut pretensioning involves several steps:
1. The bolt is snug-tightened
2. Matchmarks are placed on each nut, bolt, and steel surface in a straight line
3. The part not turned by the wrench is prevented from turning
4. The bolt is tightened with a prescribed rotation past the snug-tight condition
• The specified rotation varies by diameter and length (between 1/3 and 1 turn)
(RCSC 2000, AISC)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 305

Calibrated Wrench Installation

• Calibrated Wrench pretensioning uses an impact wrench (above left) to tighten the bolt to
a specified tension
• A Skidmore-Wilhelm calibration device (above right) is used to calibrate the impact
wrench to the torque level which will achieve the specified tension
• A sample of bolts representative of those to be used in the connections are tested to
verify that the correct tension will be achieved (RCSC 2000, AISC)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 306

153
ASTM F1852 Installation
(AISC)

• F1852 bolts are twist-off-type tension-control


bolts
• These bolts must be pretensioned with a twist-
off-type tension-control bolt installation wrench
that has two coaxial chucks
• The inner chuck engages the splined end of the
bolt
• The outer chuck engages the nut
• The two chucks turn opposite to one another to
tighten the bolt
• The splined end of the F1852 bolt shears off at a
specified tension (AISC 2003)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 307

ASTM F959 Direct Tension Indicators


DTI’s

Feeler Gages

• Another way to try to ensure proper pretensioning of a bolt is through the use of direct
tension indicators (DTIs)
• These washers have protrusions that must bear against the unturned element
• As the bolt is tightened the clamping force flattens the protrusions and reduces the gap
• The gap is measured with a feeler gage
• When the gap reaches the specified size the bolt is properly pretensioned
(AISC & NISD 2000)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 308

154
Installation of DTIs

(Adapted from Figure C-8.1 RCSC 2000)


It is essential that direct tension indicators be properly oriented in the assembly
a) The bolt head is stationary while the nut is turned – DTI under bolt head
b) The bolt head is stationary while the nut is turned – DTI under nut (washer required)
c) The nut is stationary while the bolt head is turned – DTI under bolt head (washer required)
d) The nut is stationary while the bolt head is turned – DTI under nut
(RCSC 2000)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 309

Direct Tension Indicator

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 310

155
Nominal Bolt Hole Dimensions

(Table 3.1 RCSC 2000)


• Bolts are installed in one of four types of holes (see table above)
• Standard holes can be used anywhere
• Oversized holes may only be used in slip-critical connections
• Short-slotted holes are used with the slot perpendicular to the direction of stress
• Long-slotted holes are primarily used when connecting to existing structures
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 311

Equipment Requirements

• Common tools used by Ironworkers include spud wrenches, pins, and corrections bars of
various sizes (above left)
• Impact wrenches will be needed for certain installations (above center)
• Electricity or compressed air is required depending on the impact wrench being used
 A generator as well as an air compressor may be needed (above right)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 312

156
Storage of Components

Per the RCSC Specification:


• Fastener components must be protected from dirt and moisture in closed containers on
the jobsite
• Only fasteners anticipated to be installed during the work shift are to be taken from
protected storage
• Protected storage is defined as the continuous protection of fastener components in
closed containers in a protected shelter
• Any unused fasteners must be promptly returned to protected storage
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 313

Storage of Components

• The lubrication on fasteners is vital to their proper installation


• A water-soluble oil is used on most black bolts
• This oil is easily washed off when exposed to moisture
• Fasteners that accumulate rust or dirt must be cleaned and relubricated before they may
be installed
• F1852 bolts (shown above) shall not be relubricated, except by the manufacturer
(RCSC 2000, SSTC 2001)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 314

157
Storage of Galvanized Fasteners

• Galvanized bolts and nuts (above) are provided by the supplier in a set and special
storage requirements
• Each bolt/nut set is pretested by the supplier and shipped together and must be kept
together as an assembly
• Poor thread fit may result if the bolt and nut are mismatched
• The lubrication on galvanized fasteners is generally more durable than that on black
bolts, but protected storage is still recommended
• A490 bolts are not allowed to be
JANUARY-MAY, 2011
galvanized
CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ
(SSTC 2001) 315

Production Lots

• Production lot traceability is required by many standards


• Even if not required, it is good practice to record the lot numbers and keep all fasteners
separated by lot
• It is necessary to keep lots separate for proper pre-installation verification testing which is
required for pretensioned and slip-critical joints
• Mixing bolts and nuts from different production lots is not permitted
(SSTC 2001)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 316

158
Inspections

• In addition to the erector’s quality control program, tests and inspection are specified by
the Engineer of Record and/or the local building authority
• A local building inspector may request that tests in addition to those specified by the
Engineer of Record be performed
• Snug-tightened joints require visual inspection for firm contact and proper use of washers
• Pretensioned joints require pre-installation verification and routine observation of proper
application
• Slip-critical joints require inspection of the faying surfaces in addition to the above
inspections
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 317

Inspections for the Construction Manager

There are several bolted connection inspections a construction manager can


perform:
• Look at the bolt stick-out (above)
 Stick-out is the amount the bolt extends beyond the outside surface of the nut
 Positive or zero stick-out is acceptable
 Negative stick-out, where the end of the bolt is inside the nut, is not acceptable

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 318

159
Inspections for the Construction Manager

• Inspect the turn-of-nut matchmarks to ensure the bolts have been pretensioned
• If F1852 bolts are used, make sure the ends have been snapped off all bolts (above)
 In some cases, due to insufficient clearance for the installation wrench, F1852 bolts
will be tightened by alternative methods so the ends will not be snapped off

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 319

Bolting Cost Considerations

The types of joints used in a structure are somewhat dependent on the overall
design of the structure, but these are some points to consider:
• The erector may prefer certain bolt and joint types over others due to equipment
requirements, experience, and installation times
• Snug-tightened joints are normally the most economical bolted joints (Ruby 2003)
• For pretensioned joints, F1852’s and DTI’s are popular and can be economical
• Slip-critical joints are the most costly joints, and should only be specified when necessary
(Ruby 2003)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 320

160
Types of Connections
 Riveted
 Bolted
 Bearing type
connections
 Slip-critical
connections

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 321

Disadvantages of Rivets
 Driving of rivets requires a crew of 4 or 5
experienced people, while the installation of
bolts (high or normal strength) does not
 Inspection of rivet installation is difficult, even for
the most experienced personnel
 Cutting and replacement of faulty rivets is an
expensive procedure
 Even the heating previous to the installation of
the rivets is critical to develop the necessary
clamping force

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 322

161
Disadvantages of Rivets
 Finally, the economic factor has its impact,
because even with the high cost of the
manpower but with designs that generally
require less bolts than rivets, designing with
bolts is more economic than designing with
rivets

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 323

Obsolescence of Rivets
 Availability of high strength bolts
 Development of new welding techniques

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 324

162
Types of Bolts
 A307 (Normal strength)
 A325 (High strength)
 A490 (High strength)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 325

Installation of Bolts
 Method of the turn of the nut (easiest to apply)
 Use of a calibrated wrench
 Use of special, twist - off bolts
 Direct tension indicator method
(See the previous slides on bolting)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 326

163
Turn of the Nut Method

Reference: Kulak et al.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 327

A325 and A490 Compared

Reference: Kulak et al.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 328

164
A325 and A490 Compared

Reference: Kulak et al.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 329

Advantages of High Strength Bolts


 Rigid joints: there is no relative displacement
among the parts, under service loads
 High static resistance due to friction
 Smaller load transmitted in the net section of the
plates
 There are no shear or bearing stresses in the
bolts
 High fatigue strength
 Nut loosening is avoided

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 330

165
Types of Bolted Connections
 There are two types of bolted connections:
 Bearing-type connections. The load transfer
mechanism is by shear in the bolts and bearing in the
plates. Both, normal and high strength bolts are
permitted for use in this type of connections
 Slip-critical connections. The load transfer
mechanism is by friction. Only high strength bolts are
permitted in this type of connections

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 331

BEARING – TYPE
CONNECTIONS
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 332

166
Bearing Type Connections:
Load Transfer Mechanism
 Shear in bolts
 Bearing in plates
 Shear out between the end fastener and the end
of the plate
 Fracture
 Block shear (not always applicable)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 333

Bearing Type Connections:


Failure Modes

Reference: Salmon, Johnson, and Malhas


JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 334

167
Bearing Failure

Taken from Yura’s “Elements for Teaching


LRFD”

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 335

End Tear-Out Failure

Reference: Kulak et al.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 336

168
End Tear-Out Failure

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ Reference: Huns, Grondin, and Driver 337

End Tear-Out Failure

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ Reference: Cai and Driver 338

169
End Tear-Out Failure

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ Reference: Cai and Driver 339

Strength of the Connection

φ Rn = φ Rnb N b
φ = 0.75
Rnb = bolt strength, given by the smallest of the
values in the following slides
N b = number of bolts in the connection

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 340

170
Strength Equations
 Bolt shear

φ Rnb = φ Ab Fuv N s ; φ = 0.75


Ab = bolt area
Fuv = shear strength from Table J3.2
N s = number of shear planes

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 341

Strength Equations

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 342

171
Strength Equations
 Plate bearing

φ Rnb = φ 2.4d btFu N s ; φ = 0.75


db = bolt diameter
t = plate thickness
Fu = plate tensile strength
N s = number of shear planes

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 343

Strength Equations
 Shear out failure

φ Rnb = φ1.2 LctFu ≤ φ 2.4db tFu ; φ = 0.75


Lc = clear distance, in the direction of the force,
between the edge of the hole and the edge of the
adjacent hole or end of the material
If Lc ≥ 2db , the full bearing strength can be used

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 344

172
Minimum Edge Distance

Reference: AISC Manual


JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 345

SESSION 9
DESIGN OF SIMPLE BOLTED CONNECTIONS

CV2015 DESIGN OF
STEEL MEMBERS
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 346

173
Example of Bolted Connection
 Determine the load carrying capacity of the
connection between a beam and a much stiffer
column.
 The beam is A992 steel
 The bolts are A325, ¾ in. diameter
 Electrodes are E70
 The shear plate is A36

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 347

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 348

174
Ultimate Limit States
 Shear in beam. Normally it is not critical and will be
studied later in this course
 Shear in bolts
 Bearing in plates (beam web and/or shear plate)
 Shear rupture in shear plate
 Shear yielding in shear plate
 Shear out in shear plate
 Block shear rupture in shear plate
 Shear rupture in weld metal

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 349

Ultimate Limit States


 Shear in beam. From Table 3-2, page 3-18:

φvVnx = 140.00 kips

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 350

175
Ultimate Limit States
 Shear in bolts. From table 7-15 the bolts have their
thread included in the shear plane

φ Rnb = φ Fn Ab
2
π 3
φ Rnb = 0.75 × ×   × 48 = 15.90 kips bolt
4 4  
φ Rn = N bφ Rnb = 4 ×15.90 = 63.62 kips
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 351

Ultimate Limit States


 Bearing in plates (beam web and/or shear plate). In this
case the beam web is not critical since it is thicker and
has higher strength (65 ksi Vs. 58 ksi)
For the bolt at the bottom of the shear plate:
 0.75 + 0.125 
φ Rnb = φ1.2 LctFu = ( 0.75 )(1.2 ) 1.5 −  ( 0.25 )( 58 )
 2 
φ Rnb = 13.87 kips
For the remaining bolts:
φ Rnb = φ 2.4dbtFu = ( 0.75 )( 2.4 )( 0.75 )( 0.25 )( 58 )
φ Rnb = 19.58 kips
φ Rn = 1×13.87 + 3 ×19.58
φ Rn = 72.61 kips
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 352

176
Ultimate Limit States
 Shear rupture in shear
plate
12”

  7 
Anv = 12 − ( 4 )    × 0.25 = 2.13 in 2
  8 
φ Rn = φ Anv 0.6 Fu = ( 0.75 )( 2.13)( 0.6 )( 58 )
φ Rn = 55.46 kips

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 353

Ultimate Limit States


 Shear yielding in shear
plate

12”

Agv = (12 )( 0.25 ) = 3.00 in 2


φ Rn = φ Agv 0.6 Fy = (1.00 )( 3.00 )( 0.6 )( 36 )
φ Rn = 64.80 kips

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 354

177
Ultimate Limit States
 Shear out in shear plate. This ultimate limit state
was included in the bearing strength of the shear
plate
 In the beam web, this failure mode is not an
issue

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 355

Ultimate Limit States


 Block shear rupture in
shear plate: first
possibility 12”

Nb = N bs = 4
Ant = 1.5 − ( 0.5 )( 0.875 )  × 0.25 = 0.266 in 2
Anv = 10.5 − ( 3.5 )( 0.875 )  × 0.25 = 1.859 in 2
Agv = (10.5)( 0.25) = 2.625
Anv Fu = 107.82 > Agv Fy = 94.50
φ Rnbs = φ (U bs Ant Fu + 0.6 Agv Fy ) ; U bs = 1.00
φ Rnbs = ( 0.75) (1.00 )( 0.266 )( 58) + ( 0.6 )( 94.5 ) 
φ Rnbs = 54.10 kips
4
φ Rn =   ( 54.10 ) = 54.10 kips
4
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 356

178
Ultimate Limit States
 Block shear rupture in
shear plate: second
possibility 12”
Nb = 4; Nbs = 3
Ant = 0.266 in 2
Anv = 7.5 − ( 2.5)( 0.875)  × 0.25 = 1.328 in 2
Agv = ( 7.5)( 0.25 ) = 1.875 in 2
Anv Fu = 77.02 > Agv Fy = 67.50
φ Rnbs = φ (U bs Ant Fu + 0.6 Agv Fy ) ; U bs = 1.00
φ Rnbs = ( 0.75 ) (1.00 )( 0.266 )( 58 ) + ( 0.6 )( 67.5 ) 
φ Rnbs = 41.95 kips
4
φ Rn =   ( 41.95) = 55.93 kips
3
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 357

Ultimate Limit States


 Block shear rupture in
shear plate: third
possibility 12”

N b = 4; N bs = 2
Ant = 0.266 in 2
Anv =  4.5 − (1.5 )( 0.875 )  × 0.25 = 0.797 in 2
Agv = ( 4.5 )( 0.25 ) = 1.125 in 2
Anv Fu = 46.23 > Agv Fy = 40.50
φ Rnbs = φ (U bs Ant Fu + 0.6 Agv Fy ) ; U bs = 1.00
φ Rnbs = ( 0.75 ) (1.00 )( 0.266 )( 58 ) + ( 0.6 )( 40.5 ) 
φ Rnbs = 29.80 kips
4
φ Rn =   ( 29.80 ) = 59.59 kips
 
2
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 358

179
Ultimate Limit States
 Block shear rupture in
shear plate: fourth
possibility 12”
N b = 4; N bs = 1
Ant = 0.266 in 2
Anv = 1.5 − (1.5 )( 0.875 )  × 0.25 = 0.266 in 2
Agv = (1.5 )( 0.25 ) = 0.375 in 2
Anv Fu = 15.43 > Agv Fy = 13.50
φ Rnbs = φ (U bs Ant Fu + 0.6 Agv Fy ) ; U bs = 1.00
φ Rnbs = ( 0.75) (1.00 )( 0.266 )( 58) + ( 0.6 )(13.5 ) 
φ Rnbs = 17.65 kips
4
φ Rn =   (17.65 ) = 70.58 kips
1
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 359

Ultimate Limit States


 Shear rupture in weld metal. Note that shear rupture of
the shear plate near the fusion plane is not checked
because it was already checked in the net area, which is
more critical
φ Rnw = 2φ 0.707 S w 0.60 FE 70
 3
φ Rnw = 2 ( 0.75 )( 0.707 )   ( 0.60 )( 70 ) = 8.35 kips in
 16 
φ Rn = φ Rnw Lw = ( 8.35 )(12 ) = 100.22 kips

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 360

180
Conclusion
 The load carrying capacity of the connection is
54.10 kips and it is controlled by block shear
rupture strength when all the bolts are included
in the block shear
 Compare with Table 10-9a of the Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 361

Additional Topics
 In some cases there may be bolts in two different planes
such as the L-shape shown below
 The net area is calculated by treating the shape as a
plate developed by its center line
 If the thickness changes, use an average value in the
correction term (diagonal)

Reference: Kulak et al.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 362

181
Assignment #2
 Determine the service load capacity of the
tension chord splice of two channels shown in
the next slide if the live load is three times the
dead load. The steel is A572 Grade 50, and the
3/4-in.-diameter bolts are in a bearing-type
connection (A325). The separation between the
two channels is 1/2 in.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 363

Assignment #2

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 364

182
Assignment #2
 Assignment. Determine the strength of a shear
connection similar to the one we studied in class
with the following data:
 Five A325 ¾ in. diameter bolts instead of four
 Distance center to center of holes = 3.00 in.
 Distance between the top (or bottom) bolt and the top
(or bottom) edge of the shear plate = 1.25 in. as
indicated in Table J3.4
 Horizontal distance between the center of the hole
and the right edge of the shear plate = 1.50 in.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 365

Assignment (Do not hand-in)


 Solve Problems 3.1, 3.6 (all cases), 3.11, 3.13,
4.4, 4.5, 4.9, 5.3, 5.8, and 5.10 of the textbook:
“Steel Structures, Design and Behavior
Emphasizing Load And Resistance Factor
Design”, 4th Edition, by Charles G. Salmon and
John E. Johnson

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 366

183
SESSION 10

SLIP – CRITICAL
CONNECTIONS
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 367

Slip-Critical Connections
 These connections are used when it is important
to prevent slip between the connected parts
 Slip resistance is proportional to the clamping
force which is equal to the bolt pretension
 Because slip resistance depends on the bolt
pretension, only high strength bolts are
permitted

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 368

184
Slip-Critical Connections

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 369

Slip-Critical Connections
 The design slip resistance is given by

φ Rnb = φµ Du hscTb N s
φ = 1.00 for connections where slip is a serviceability limit state
φ = 0.85 for connections designed to prevent slip at the required strength

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 370

185
Slip-Critical Connections

Reference: AISC Manual


JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 371

Slip-Critical Connections

Reference: AISC Manual


JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 372

186
Slip-Critical Connections
 Once the number of bolts required to avoid slip
has been determined, the resulting array of bolts
must be checked by all the ultimate limit states
of bearing-type connections
 This is to assure the structural integrity of the
connection in case the slip resistance has been
overwhelmed by an overload
 When this happens, the connection becomes
automatically a bearing-type connection

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 373

Bolting and Welding


Scheduling Considerations

• Bolting is generally a faster operation than welding


• Bolting does not have the temperature and weather condition requirements that
are associated with welding
• Unexpected weather changes may delay welding operations
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 374

187
CV2015 DESIGN OF
STEEL MEMBERS
MODULE 4
DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR
COMPRESSION

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 375

CV2015 DESIGN OF
STEEL MEMBERS
Session 11
Design of Compression Members
with Symmetric Cross Section

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 376

188
Introduction
 Compression members are used as:
 Columns in buildings (vertical elements)
 Members in trusses subject to compressive forces
 Bridge piers

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 377

Introduction

Reference: Kulak et al.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 378

189
Strength of Columns
 Basically, the strength of a column depends on
the following factors (from Solid Mechanics II):

 Slenderness ratio, (KL/r)

 Yield stress, Fy

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 379

Types of Columns

Reference: Kulak et al.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 380

190
Types of Columns
 Short column
 It fails by yielding Pn = Ag Fy
 The slenderness ratio does
not play an important role
in the strength
 There is no buckling

 Long column π 2 EI
 It fails by elastic buckling Pn = 2
 Strength depends on the
slenderness ratio
( KL )
 Strength is independent
from yield stress

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 381

Types of Columns
 Intermediate column
 It fails by inelastic buckling
 Strength depends on both, yield stress and slenderness ratio
 The tangent mudulus theory is used for the strength
 Most columns fall in this category

π 2 ET I
Pn = 2
( KL )
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 382

191
Cross Section Behavior

Reference: Kulak et al., adapted from


Tall

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 383

Cross Section Behavior


 Important points of the stress-strain curve:

 Early yielding (point 15) due to residual strains in


compression

 Progressive yielding (from point 15 to 27) until the


complete cross section yields

 There is no strain hardening

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 384

192
Pattern of Residual Stresses: Hot
Rolled Sections

Reference: Galambos’ Guide

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 385

Pattern of Residual Stresses:


Welded Sections

Reference: Galambos’ Guide

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 386

193
Elastic Buckling Strength

M y = Pu
d 2u
EI y = −M y
dz 2
d 2u
EI y 2 + Pu = 0
dz
 P   P 
u = A sin  z  + B cos  z 
 EI y   EI y 
   

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 387

Elastic Buckling Strength


Boundary conditions: From (a)
a ) At z = 0 u = 0  P 
b) At z = L u = 0 u = A sin  z 
 EI y 
 

From (b)  P 
sin  L cr  = 0
  EI y 
P  
u = A sin  L cr  = 0
 EI y  Pcr
 L = nπ n = 1, 2,3,...
EI y
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 388

194
Elastic Buckling Strength
 The elastic buckling load is given by the following
expression:

n 2π 2 EI y
Pcr = 2
; n = 1, 2,3,...
L
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 389

Buckling Modes

Reference: Martini

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 390

195
Strong Axis Buckling (x-axis
Buckling)

n=1

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 391

Reference: Martini

Weak Axis Buckling (y-axis


Buckling)

Braced
Column
n=2

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 392

Reference: Martini

196
Design of Columns by
AISC-LRFD
 The AISC-LRFD specifications consider two cases for
the design of columns, based on the value of the
slenderness ratio:
 Elastic behavior
 Inelastic behavior

Slenderness ratio:
KL
r
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 393

Design of Columns
 Torsion does not take place when column
buckles
 Cross section has a representative pattern of
residual stresses
 Maximum initial imperfection of L/1500
 Local buckling does not take place when column
buckles

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 394

197
Design of Columns by
AISC-LRFD Chapter E
φc Pn = φc Ag Fcr φc = 0.90

KL E  Fy

If ≤ 4.71 ( or Fe ≥ 0.44 Fy ) : Fcr = 0.658 Fe  Fy
r Fy  
KL E
If
r
> 4.71
Fy
( or F e < 0.44 Fy ) : Fcr = 0.877 Fe

Fe = elastic critical stress


π 2E
Fe = 2
 KL 
 
 r 
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 395

Effective Length Factor (K)


 The effective length factor is introduced to use
the design rules developed for simply supported
columns
 The strength of the original column will be equal
to that of a simply supported column of length
equal to KL, the effective length

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 396

198
Effective Length Factor
(Isolated Columns)

Reference: AISC Manual


JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 397

Effect of End Restraint

Reference: Kulak et al.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 398

199
Types of Frames

 Braced frames
 No sidesway takes place when columns buckle
 The diagonals are the bracing members

 Unbraced frames
 Sidesway takes place when columns buckle

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 399

Types of Frames
Braced frames Unbraced frames

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 400

200
Braced Frames

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 401

Unbraced Frames

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 402

201
Effective Length:
Columns in Frames
 Assumptions:
 Behavior is purely elastic
 All members have constant cross section
 All joints are rigid
 For braced frames, rotations at opposite ends of beams are
equal in magnitude, producing single-curvature bending
 For unbraced frames, rotations at opposite ends of the
restraining beams are equal in magnitude, producing reverse-
curvature bending
 The stiffness parameter of all columns are equal
 Joint restraint is distributed to the column above and below the
joint in proportion to I/L of the two columns (recall moment
distribution)
 All columns buckle simultaneously
 No significant axial compression force exists in the girders

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 403

Effective Length (Braced Frames)

Reference: McGuire

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 404

202
Effective Length (Braced Frames)
 All the beams deform 2 EI b
symmetrically M 1−1' = θ1
Lb

The moment at end A of ( I c Lc ) × 2Eθ 2 EI c


A ∑ ( Ib
 MA = Lb ) = θA
the column is given by ∑ ( Ic Lc ) GLc
the following equation G=
∑ ( EIc Lc )
∑ ( EIb Lb )

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 405

Effective Length (Braced Frames)


 The effective length of a column in a braced frame is
obtained by solving the first of the equations shown, or
using the second (approximate) equation

 π K  2 tan (π 2 K )
2
G AGB  π   GA + GB
  +  1 − + =1
4 K  2   tan (π K )  π K
Alternate equation (CM66)
3G AGB + 1.4 ( GA + GB ) + 0.64
K=
3G AGB + 2.0 ( GA + GB ) + 1.28

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 406

203
Effective Length (Braced Frames)
 Calculate GA and GB
 Locate, on the two lateral
scales of the alignment chart,
the points corresponding to the
values of GA and GB
 Join these two points by a
straight line
 The value of K corresponds to
the point where this line
crosses the central scale of the
alignment chart

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 407

Effective Length
(Unbraced Frames)
 Beams deform in an antisymmetrical manner
 All beams have the same length
 All columns have the same height
 All columns have the same axial load
 All columns have the same end restraints

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 408

204
Effective Length of Unbraced
Frames - Assumptions

Reference: McGuire

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 409

Effective Length of Unbraced


Frames
 The effective length of a column in an unbraced frame is
obtained by solving the first of the equations shown, or
using the second (approximate) equation

2
G AGB (π K ) − 36 π K
=
6 ( G A + GB ) tan (π K )
Alternate equation (CM66)
1.6GAGB + 4.0 ( G A + GB ) + 7.5
K=
G A + GB + 7.5

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 410

205
K-Factor by Alignment Chart
 Calculate GA and GB
 Locate, on the two lateral
scales of the alignment chart,
the points corresponding to the
values of GA and GB
 Join these two points by a
straight line
 The value of K corresponds to
the point where this line
crosses the central scale of the
alignment chart

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 411

K - Factor by Alignment Chart


Considerations
 For column ends supported by but not rigidly
connected to a footing or foundation, G is
theoretically infinity, but may be taken as 10
 For column ends rigidly attached to a properly
designed footing, G may be taken as 1.0

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 412

206
Alignment Charts Compared

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 413

Additional Considerations
 For simply supported columns the theoretical value of G
is infinity. AISC recommends to use 10
 For fixed-ended columns the theoretical value of G is
zero. AISC recommends to use 1
 Some refinements can be made in calculating the
stiffness of the beams (not widely used in practice):
 For braced frames, multiply the stiffness of the beam by:
 1.5 if the far end is pinned
 2.0 if the far end is fixed
 For unbraced frames, multiply the stiffness of the beam by:
 0.5 if the far end is pinned
 0.67 if the far end is fixed
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 414

207
Additional Considerations
 If the column buckles in the inelastic range, the value of
G is calculated using the tangent modulus of the column,
ET
 τ is called stiffness reduction factor and can be obtained
from Table 4-21 of the AISC-LRFD Manual or calculated
using the following equation

Gin =
∑( E I L)
T columns

∑ ( EI L )
columns

∑ ( EI L ) beams ∑ ( EI L ) beams

Gin = τ Gel
 Pn  P 
τ = −2.724   ln  n 
P
 y   Py 

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 415

CV2015 DESIGN OF
STEEL MEMBERS
Session 12
Design Example #1 of a Doubly
Symmetric Column

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 416

208
Example #1 of Column Design
 Select the lightest W12 shape in A992 steel for column
AB subjected to a factored axial load of 1,180 kips.
 The columns are braced along their length in the
direction perpendicular to the frame.
 In the plane of the frame the columns are unbraced.
 The far ends of the beams are fixed against rotation.
This means that the 2/3 coefficient is to be used for the
stiffnesses of the beams.
 The selection should be made based on:
 Elastic behavior
 Inelastic behavior

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 417

Column Design Example #1


Same as column AB

14 ft
W21x68 W21x68 W21x68 W21x68
A
14 ft

B
W21x68 W21x68 W21x68 W21x68
14 ft

28 ft 28 ft 28 ft 28 ft

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 418

209
Previous Considerations
 From the problem statement:
 Effective length for y-axis buckling is zero because
the column is continuously braced along its length
 Hence, the column will necessarily buckle about x-
axis (thus, we have to assume a value of Kx to make
a preliminary selection and, once a shape selection
has been made, calculate the corresponding effective
length factor using the alignment chart or the CM-66
equation)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 419

Previous Considerations
 Since column buckles about the x-axis, we need
an estimation of effective length (KL)x
 From Table C-C2.1, assume Kx = 2.00
 Hence, (KL)x = 28 ft
 To make a preliminary selection we use the
design aids included in the AISC manual
 First, we must find an equivalent effective length
for y-axis buckling that yields the same strength
as the one corresponding to the actual critical
effective length factor, (KL)x
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 420

210
Solution Based on Elastic
Behavior

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 421

Equivalent Effective Length


 The equivalent effective length for y-axis buckling is
obtained by equating the following slenderness ratios:

( KL ) x ( KL ) y eq
=
rx ry
( KL ) x
( KL ) y eq = rx
ry
where
( KL ) x
= slenderness ratio for x-axis buckling
rx
( KL ) y eq
= slenderness ratio for y-axis buckling that yields the same load capacity
ry
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 422

211
Equivalent Effective Length
 For the W12 shapes that can resist a factored load of
1,180 kips the approximate value of the rx/ry ratio is 1.75.
Hence,

( KL ) x 28.00
( KL ) y eq = = = 16 ft
rx ry 1.75

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 423

Preliminary Selection
 The trial W12 shape should have a strength of at
least 1,180 kips for an effective length about the
y-axis equal to 16 ft
 From Table 4-1, Page 4-16, the preliminary W12
shape is W12x120

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 424

212
Compression Strength of W12x120

KL = 16 ft
rx
= 1.76
ry
φc Pn = 1, 210 kips > Pu = 1,180 kips

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 425

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 426


Reference: AISC Manual

213
Calculation of Kx
 Cross section properties I x = 1, 070 in 4
of W12x120
b f = 12.3 in

 Cross section properties I x = 1, 480 in 4


of W21x68
b f = 8.27 in
b f < b f col = 12.3 in

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 427

Calculation of Kx
Gtop = Gbottom = G
2 × (1, 070 14 )
G= = 2.169
2 × (1, 480 28 )( 2 3)
K x = 1.65
( KL ) x = 1.65 ×14 = 23.1 ft
23.1
( KL ) y eq = = 13.13 ft < ( KL ) y eq assumed
1.76
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 428

214
Revision of Trial Shape
 Table 4-1 does not have a value for an effective length
(KL)y = 13.13 ft
 Hence, we use linear interpolation between values of
(KL)y of 13 and 14 ft

φc Pn = 1,316 kips > Pu = 1,180 kips

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 429

Revision of Trial Shape


 Since there is a considerable excess in axial
compression capacity, we try a lighter W12
shape
 Try W12x106

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 430

215
Revision of New Trial Shape
Cross section properties

of W12x106
I x = 933 in 4
b f = 12.2 in
rx
= 1.76
ry

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 431

Calculation of Kx for New Trial


Section
Gtop = Gbottom = G
2 × ( 933 14 )
G= = 1.891
2 × (1, 480 28 )( 2 3)
K x = 1.58
( KL ) x = 1.58 ×14 = 22.12 ft
22.12
( KL ) y eq = = 12.57 ft
1.76
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 432

216
Lightest W12 Shape Assuming
Elastic Behavior
 For an effective length of 12.57 ft, we obtain the
following axial compression strength by linear
interpolation:

φc Pn = 1,183 kips > Pu = 1,180 kips

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 433

SOLUTION BASED ON
INELASTIC BEHAVIOR
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 434

217
Selection Based on Inelastic
Behavior

 When inelastic behavior is considered the


effective length is reduced and, as a
consequence, the strength is increased

 Hence, we try the next lighter W12 shape,


W12x96, to see if it can resist the factored load
when inelastic behavior is taken into account

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 435

Revision of W12x96
 Cross section properties Ag = 28.2 in 2
of the W12x96
I x = 833 in 4
b f = 12.2 in
rx
= 1.76
ry

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 436

218
Stiffness Reduction Factor τ
 The stiffness reduction factor depends on the level of
stress due to the axial load

Pu 1,180
= = 41.84 ksi
Ag 28.2
τ = 0.184

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 437

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 438

219
Calculation of Kx

Gtop = Gbottom = G
Ginel = τ Gelastic
2 × ( 833 14 )
Ginel = 0.184 × = 0.311
2 × (1, 480 28 )( 2 3)
K x = 1.12

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 439

Calculation of Axial Compression


Strength

( KL ) x = 1.12 ×14 = 15.68 ft


15.68
( KL ) y eq = = 8.91 ft
1.76
φc Pn = 1,162 kips < Pu = 1,180 kips

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 440

220
Lightest W12 Shape Assuming
Inelastic Behavior
 The lightest W12 shape to resist the factored load of
1,180 kips is a W12x106 with an axial load capacity of

φc Pn = 1, 257 kips
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 441

Conclusion
 If inelastic behavior is not
considered the lightest
φc Pn = 1,183 kips
W12 shape to resist the
factored load of 1,180
kips is a W12x106 with:

 If inelastic behavior is
considered the lightest φc Pn = 1, 257 kips
W12 shape to resist the
factored load of 1,180
kips is a W12x106 with:

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 442

221
CV2015 DESIGN OF
STEEL MEMBERS
Session 13
Design Example #2 of a Doubly
Symmetric Column

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 443

Example #2 of Column Design


 Design column A of the unbraced frame shown as an
axially loaded compression member carrying a dead
load of 69 kips and a live load of 277 kips using
A992 steel. In the plane perpendicular to the frame
the system is braced, with supports at top and bottom
of a 21-ft height

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 444

222
Column Design Example #2

P W14x82 P W14x82 P W14x82 P

A 21 ft

3 @ 40 ft = 120 ft

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 445

CV2015 DESIGN OF
STEEL MEMBERS
Session 14
Local Buckling and
Flexural-Torsional Buckling

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 446

223
Types of Column Buckling

 General buckling by bending (flexural buckling


already covered in previous sessions)

 Local buckling

 Flexural-Torsional buckling

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 447

Local Buckling

 Occurs when the slenderness ratio of at least


one of the elements of the cross section
exceeds a limiting value

 That limiting value is specified in Table B4.1

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 448

224
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 449

Reference: AISC Manual

Local Buckling

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 450

225
Local Buckling
 Compression flange local
buckling took place
because the compressive
stress exceeded the
critical or buckling stress
of the flange

Reference: Tall (Ed.).

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 451

Local Buckling
 Finite Element simulation
of flange local buckling of
a doubly symmetric I-
shaped cross section
Referene: http://www.ce.luth.se/abb/exjobb/hanhell/

 Local buckling of a real


doubly symmetric I-
shaped cross section
Reference: Zureick.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 452

226
Local Buckling
 Finite Element simulation
of flange local buckling of
a doubly symmetric I-
shaped cross section

 Finite Element simulation


of flange local buckling of
a singly symmetric I-
shaped cross section
Referene: http://www.ce.luth.se/abb/exjobb/hanhell/

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 453

Local Buckling
 Local buckling is studied by considering each element of
the cross section as a plate and obtaining the critical
stress for each of the plates forming the cross section

∂ 4w ∂ 4w ∂ 4w 1  ∂ 2w ∂ 2w ∂ 2w 
+ 2 + =  N + N + 2 N 
∂ x4 ∂ x 2∂ y 2 ∂ y 4 D  x ∂ x 2 y
∂ y2 xy
∂ x∂ y 
w = plate deflection
N x , N y , and N xy = stresses
D = plate stiffness
Et 3 kπ 2 E
D= σ cr =
12 (1 −ν 2 )
2
b
12 (1 −ν 2 )  
t Reference: Szilard.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 454

227
Local Buckling: Critical Stress
 In the previous slide,
 k = buckling coefficient which depends on the plate
aspect ratio (a/b) and the support conditions along the
edges of the plate
 E = modulus of elasticity
 ν = Poisson’s ratio

Reference: Szilard.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 455

Local Buckling: Critical Stress

Reference: Brush y Almroth.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 456

228
Cross Section Classification for
Local Buckling

 Compact λ ≤ λp

 Non-compact λ p < λ ≤ λr

 Slender λ > λr
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 457

Flexural-Torsional Buckling

C = Centroid
O = Shear center

References: Galambos; Timoshenko and


Gere.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 458

229
Flexural-Torsional Buckling
 Governing General Second-Order Equations (Elastic
Behavior)

EI x v IV + Pv′′ − Pxoφ ′′ = 0
EI y u IV + Pu′′ + Pyoφ ′′ = 0
ECwφ IV + ( Pro2 − GJ ) φ ′′ + Pyo u′′ − Pxo v′′ = 0

References: Galambos; Timoshenko and


Gere.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 459

Flexural-Torsional Buckling
 u = shear center deflection in the x-direction
 v = shear center deflection in the y-direction
 φ = rotational displacement by torsion
 xo = x-coordinate of shear center
 yo = y-coordinate of shear center
 ro = polar radius of gyration about the shear center

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 460

230
Flexural-Torsional Buckling
 A = area of cross section
 Ix = moment of inertia about the x-axis
 Iy = moment of inertia about the y-axis
 J = Saint Venant torsional constant
 Cw = warping constant
 E = modulus of elasticity
 G = shear modulus of elasticity
 P = axial load

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 461

Flexural-Torsional Buckling

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 462

231
Flexural-Torsional Buckling

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 463

Flexural-Torsional Buckling:
Doubly Symmetric Sections
 For cross section with two axes of symmetry:
 (xo = yo = 0)

P
v IV + v′′ = 0
EI x
P
u IV + u ′′ = 0
EI y
IV Pro2 − GJ
φ + φ ′′ = 0
ECw References: Galambos; Timoshenko and
Gere.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 464

232
Flexural-Torsional Buckling:
Doubly Symmetric Sections

x − axis buckling y − axis buckling


2
π EI x π 2 EI y
Pcrx = Pcry =
L2 L2
2
π 2 EI x π EI y
Pcrx = 2
Pcry = 2
( Kx L) ( K L) y

For doubly-symmetric sections,


Torsional buckling failure can be by:
a) x-axis buckling
 π 2 ECw  1
Pcrz =  2
+ GJ  2 b) y-axis buckling
 L  r0
c) Torsional buckling

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 465

Flexural-Torsional Buckling:
Doubly Symmetric Sections
 Example of column
flexural buckling

π 2 EI y
Pcry =
L2
π 2 EI y
Pcry = 2
( K y L)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 466

233
Flexural-Torsional Buckling:
Doubly Symmetric Sections
 Finite Element simulation
of column flexural
buckling about the y-axis
(doubly symmetric I-
shaped section)

π 2 EI y
Pcry =
L2
π 2 EI y
Pcry = 2
Referene: http://www.ce.luth.se/abb/exjobb/hanhell/ ( K L)
y

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 467

Flexural-Torsional Buckling:
Doubly Symmetric Sections
 Finite Element simulation
of column flexural
buckling (doubly
symmetric cruciform
section)

π 2 EI
Pcr = 2
( KL )
Referene: http://www.ce.luth.se/abb/exjobb/hanhell/

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 468

234
Flexural-Torsional Buckling:
Doubly Symmetric Sections
 Finite Element simulation
of torsional buckling of a
doubly symmetric I-
shaped cross section

 π 2 ECw  1
Pcrz =  2
+ GJ  2
 L  r0
Referene: http://www.ce.luth.se/abb/exjobb/hanhell/

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 469

Flexural-Torsional Buckling:
Doubly Symmetric Sections
 Finite Element simulation
of torsional buckling of a
doubly symmetric
cruciform cross section

 π 2 ECw  1
Pcrz =  2
+ GJ  2
 L  r0
Referene: http://www.ce.luth.se/abb/exjobb/hanhell/

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 470

235
Flexural-Torsional Buckling:
Singly Symmetric Sections
 For cross section with one axis of symmetry (assume y-
axis is the axis of symmetry):
 For symmetry about the y-axis, xo = 0 and yo≠ 0
P
v IV + v′′ = 0
EI x
P P
u IV + u ′′ + yoφ ′′ = 0
EI y EI y
IV Pro2 − GJ P
φ + φ ′′ + yo u ′′ = 0
ECw ECw References: Galambos; Timoshenko and
Gere.
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 471

Flexural-Torsional Buckling:
Singly Symmetric Sections
 Failure by x-axis buckling (the axis perpendicular to the
axis of symmetry)

π 2 EI x
Pcrx =
L2
π 2 EI x
Pcrx = 2
( KxL)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 472

236
Flexural-Torsional Buckling:
Singly Symmetric Sections
 Failure by flexural-torsional buckling with bending about
y-axis (the axis of symmetry) only plus torsion

P P
u IV + u ′′ + yoφ ′′ = 0
EI y EI y
IV Pro2 − GJ P
φ + φ ′′ + you ′′ = 0
ECw ECw
References: Galambos; Timoshenko and
Gere.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 473

Flexural-Torsional Buckling:
Singly Symmetric Sections
 Failure by flexural-torsional buckling with bending about
y-axis (the axis of symmetry) only plus torsion
 Pcr is obtained from:

(P − P ) y Pyo
=0
Pyo ro ( P − Pz )
2

References: Galambos; Timoshenko and


Gere.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 474

237
Flexural-Torsional Buckling:
Singly Symmetric Sections
 Failure by flexural- ro2 ( P − Py ) ( P − Pz ) − ( Pyo ) = 0
2

torsional buckling
(bending about y-axis Py + Pz  4 Py Pz H 

P= 1± 1−
only plus torsion) 2 H  ( Py + Pz )
2

 

 The above equation is Fcry + Fcrz  4 Fcry Fcrz H 



Fcr = 1− 1−
written in terms of 2 H  ( Fcry + Fcrz )
2

 
stresses in the
specifications as Fey + Fez  4 Fey Fez H 

Fe = 1− 1−
2 H  ( Fey + Fez )
2

 
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 475

Flexural-Torsional Buckling:
Singly Symmetric Sections

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 476

238
Flexural-Torsional Buckling:
Singly Symmetric Sections

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 477

Flexural-Torsional Buckling:
Singly Symmetric Sections
 Finite Element simulation
of flexural buckling of a
C-shaped cross section

π 2 EI y
Pcry =
L2
π 2 EI y
Pcry = 2
Referene: http://www.ce.luth.se/abb/exjobb/hanhell/ ( K L)
y
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 478

239
Flexural-Torsional Buckling:
Singly Symmetric Sections
 Finite Element simulation
of flexural-torsional
buckling of a singly
symmetric I-shaped cross
section

Py + Pz  4 Py Pz H 

P= 1− 1−
2 H  ( Py + Pz )
2

Referene: http://www.ce.luth.se/abb/exjobb/hanhell/  
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 479

Flexural-Torsional Buckling:
Singly Symmetric Sections
 Finite Element simulation
of flexural-torsional
buckling of a C-shaped
cross section

Py + Pz  4 Py Pz H 

P= 1− 1−
2 H  ( Py + Pz )
2

Referene: http://www.ce.luth.se/abb/exjobb/hanhell/
 
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 480

240
Flexural-Torsional Buckling:
Unsymmetric Sections
 For an unsymmetric cross section:
 (xo ≠ 0; yo ≠ 0)

EI x v IV + Pv′′ − Pxoφ ′′ = 0
EI y u IV + Pu ′′ + Pyoφ ′′ = 0
ECwφ IV + ( Pro2 − GJ ) φ ′′ + Pyou ′′ − Pxo v′′ = 0

References: Galambos; Timoshenko and


Gere.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 481

Flexural-Torsional Buckling:
Unsymmetric Sections
 For unsymmetric cross sections, flexural-torsional
buckling takes place (x- and y-axes bending plus torsion)
 Pcr is obtained from:

( P − Px ) 0 − Pxo
0 (P − P ) y Pyo =0
− Pxo Pyo ro2 ( P − Pz )

References: Galambos; Timoshenko and


Gere.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 482

241
Flexural-Torsional Buckling:
Unsymmetric Sections
 Failure takes place by flexural-torsional buckling under a
load which is the lowest of the three roots of the
following equation:

 xo2   yo2 
( P − Px ) ( P − Py ) ( P − Pz ) − P 2 ( P − Py )  2 
− P 2
( P − P )
x  2 =0
 ro   ro 
In AISC specifications :
 xo2   yo2 
( Fe − Fex ) ( Fe − Fey ) ( Fe − Fez ) − Fe2 ( Fe − Fey )  2  − Fe
2
( Fe − F )
ex  2  = 0
 ro   ro 
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 483

Flexural-Torsional Buckling:
Unsymmetric Sections

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 484

242
Flexural-Torsional Buckling:
Unsymmetric Sections
 Finite Element simulation
of flexural-torsional
buckling of an
unsymmetric L-shaped
cross section

 xo2   yo2 
( P − Px ) ( P − Py ) ( P − Pz ) − P 2 ( P − Py )  2 
− P 2
( P − P )
x  2 =0
 ro   ro 

Referene: http://www.ce.luth.se/abb/exjobb/hanhell/

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 485

CV2015 DESIGN OF
STEEL MEMBERS
Session 15
Example: Flexural-Torsional
Buckling without Local Buckling

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 486

243
Flexural-Torsional Buckling
Example
 Determine the strength of the diagonal shown,
which is composed of two A36 steel L6x4x5/8
Long Legs Back-to-Back. Two fully tensioned
bolts are used as intermediate connectors. Use
effective length factors Kx = Ky = 1.0.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 487

Flexural-Torsional Buckling
Example

8'-5"

11'-2.25"

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 488

244
Flexural-Torsional Buckling
Example

tw = 3/8 in

t
4f
=1
in
56
3@ L6x4x5/8 LLBB

tw = 3/8 in

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 489

Specifications for Built-Up


Members in Compression

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 490

245
Specifications for Built-Up
Members in Compression

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 491

Specifications for Built-Up


Members in Compression

Reference: AISC Manual


JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 492

246
Specifications for Built-Up
Members in Compression

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 493

CV2015 DESIGN OF
STEEL MEMBERS
Session 16
Example: Flexural-Torsional
Buckling with Local Buckling

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 494

247
Example: Flexural-Torsional
Buckling with Local Buckling
 Determine the compression strengths of a double angle,
2L8x6x½ Short Legs Back-to-Back, with effective lengths
(KL)x = (KL)y = 24 ft separated 3/8". The intermediate
connectors are snug-tight bolts at 4 ft intervals. The
material is A992.
y

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 495

Possible Failure Modes


 Flexural buckling about the x-axis (the axis perpendicular to the axis
of symmetry)
 Flexural-torsional buckling, with bending about the y-axis (the axis of
symmetry) simultaneous with torsion
 Local buckling, since the slenderness ratio of the angle is greater
than that given in Table B4.1
Note: Local buckling calculations are included in the first two
y

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 496

248
Local Buckling
 Slenderness ratio of the b 8
= = 16
t 1
largest leg of the angle 2
E 29, 000 b
0.45 = 0.45 = 10.8 <
Fy 50 t

 Since local buckling takes E 29, 000 b


0.91 = 0.91 = 21.9 > = 16
place, we must calculate Fy 50 t
the local buckling b F
coefficient, Q, based on ∴ Qs = 1.340 − 0.76   y = 0.835
t E
Section E7
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 497

Flexural Buckling About the X-axis


 Calculation of the ( KL ) x
=
24 ×12
= 160.89
slenderness ratio for x- rx 1.79
axis buckling and the ( KL ) x
> 4.71
E
= 124.13
corresponding rx QFy
compression strength ∴ failure is by elastic buckling
π 2E
Fcr = 0.877 Fe = 0.877 2
 KL 
 
 r x
29, 000π 2
Fcr = 0.877 2
= 9.70 ksi
(160.89 )
φc Pn = φc Ag Fcr = ( 0.90 )(13.6 )( 9.70 ) = 118.7 kips

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 498

249
Flexural-Torsional Buckling
 Calculation of the modified slenderness ratio for snug-
tight bolts, Section E6
2 2
 KL   KL   a 
  =   + 
 r m  r o  ri 
 KL  ( KL ) y 24 × 12 a a 4 × 12
  = = = 78.26; = = = 36.92
 r o ry 3.68 ri rz 1.30
a 24 × 12
< 0.75 × = 120.67
ri 1.79
 KL 
  = 86.53
 r m
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 499

Flexural-Torsional Buckling
 KL   KL   π 2 EC  1
  =  = 86.53 Fez =  w
+ GJ 
 r  y  r m 2 2
 ( KL ) z  Ag r0
π 2E 29, 000π 2
Fey = 2
= = 38.23 ksi Cw = 2 × 2.28 = 4.56 in 6 ; J = 2 × 0.584 = 1.168 in 4
 KL  (86.53)2
  Ag = 13.6 in 2 ; r0 = 4.26 in
 r y

 29, 000π 2 × 4.56 


Fez =  + 11, 200 ×1.168
1
= 53.07 ksi Fey + Fez  4 Fey Fez H 
 ( 24 × 12 )
2
 (13.6 )( 4.26 )
2
Fe = 1− 1− = 33.56 ksi

( Fey + Fez ) 
2
2H 
H = 0.919 
Fey + Fez = 91.30 ksi; Fey Fez = 2.029 ×103 ksi 2 Fe > 0.44QFy = 0.44 × 0.835 × 50 = 18.37 ksi

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 500

250
Flexural-Torsional Buckling
 Compression strength for y-axis flexural-torsional
buckling

QFy
Fe
Fcr = Q(0.658) Fy = 24.80 ksi
φc Pn = ( 0.90 )(13.6 )( 24.80 ) = 303.6 kips
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 501

Flexural-Torsional Buckling
 Conclusion:
 Strength for flexural φc Pn = 118.7 kips
buckling about the x-axis:

 Strength for flexural-


torsional buckling about the φc Pn = 303.6 kips
y-axis:

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 502

251
Flexural-Torsional Buckling
 Notes:
 We can not use Table 4-10 directly because bolts are
snug-tight and not fully tensioned
 In this particular example, steel is Grade 50 and
Table 4-10 is for Grade 36 steel

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 503

CV2015 DESIGN OF
STEEL MEMBERS
Session 17
Design of Members for Flexure

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 504

252
Limit States for Beams
 Ultimate limit states:  Serviceability limit states
 Flexure  Deflections
 Yielding  Vibrations
 Lateral-torsional buckling
 Elastic
 Inelastic
 Local buckling
 Shear
 Yielding
 Inelastic buckling
 Elastic buckling
 Effects of concentrated forces
 Flange local bending
 Web local yielding
 Web crippling
 Web sidesway buckling
 Web compression buckling

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 505

Ultimate Limit States


 Flexure. Flexural strength depends mainly on
(see Chapter F):
 Lateral support conditions (lateral-torsional buckling).
 Slenderness ratios of the elements of the cross
section (local buckling).
 Shear. Shear strength depends mainly on the
slenderness ratio of the web (see Chapter G)
 Effects of concentrated forces (see Section 10 of
Chapter J)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 506

253
Serviceability Limit States
 The main Serviceability Limit States applied to
beams are:
 Camber (used to achieve proper position and location
of the structure, the magnitude, direction, and location
of camber should be specified in the structural
drawings). Section 2 of Chapter L
 Deflections. Section 3 of Chapter L
 Floor Vibrations. Section 5 of Chapter L

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 507

Flexural Strength ─ LTB


Mn

Mp

Mr

Lp Lr Lb

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 508

254
Flexural Strength ─ Local Buckling
Mn

Mp

Mr

λp λr λ

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 509

Local Buckling
 Compression flange local
buckling took place
because the compressive
stress exceeded the
critical or buckling stress
of the flange

Reference: Tall (Ed.).

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 510

255
Design for Flexure – Ultimate Limit
States (Plastic Moment)

Figure from Tall’s book

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 511

Design for Flexure – Ultimate Limit


States (Plastic Hinge)

Figure from Salmon and Johnson’s book

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 512

256
Design for Flexure – Ultimate Limit
States (Plastic Hinge)

Figures from Salmon and Johnson’s and Gaylord, Gaylord, and Stallmeyer’s books

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 513

Design for Flexure


 The following cases will be considered:
 Doubly symmetric compact I-shaped beams in major
axis bending
 Doubly symmetric I-shaped beams with compact
webs and noncompact or slender flanges in major
axis bending
 Other I-shaped members with compact or
noncompact webs in major axis bending
 I-shaped members bent about their minor axis

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 514

257
Design for Flexure – Ultimate Limit States for Doubly
Symmetric Compact I-Shaped Beams in Major Axis Bending

 Failure in bending may be by:


 Yielding
 With moment redistribution
 Without moment redistribution
 Lateral-Torsional Buckling
 Elastic
 Inelastic

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 515

Design for Flexure – Ultimate Limit States for Doubly


Symmetric Compact I-Shaped Beams in Major Axis Bending

 Yielding (with and without moment redistribution)

φb M n = φb M p ; φb = 0.90
M p = Z x Fy
M p = plastic moment
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 516

258
Design for Flexure – Ultimate Limit States for Doubly
Symmetric Compact I-Shaped Beams in Major Axis Bending

 Lateral – Torsional Buckling (LTB). This ultimate limit


state is only applicable to members subject to major axis
bending. The design strength is given by φbMn, where:

φb = 0.90
M n = nominal flexural strength determined as follows:

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 517

Design for Flexure – Ultimate Limit States for Doubly


Symmetric Compact I-Shaped Beams in Major Axis Bending

 Lateral – Torsional Buckling. Doubly symmetric sections


with Lb≤Lp. In this case there is no lateral-torsional
buckling and the bending moment capacity of the beam
is controlled by yielding

M nx = M px = Z x Fy

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 518

259
Design for Flexure – Ultimate Limit States for Doubly
Symmetric Compact I-Shaped Beams in Major Axis Bending

 Lateral – Torsional Buckling. Doubly symmetric sections


with Lp<Lb≤Lr. In this case there is inelastic lateral-
torsional buckling
 L − Lp 
M n = Cb  M p − ( M p − 0.7 Fy S x ) b  ≤Mp
 Lr − Lp 
E
Lp = 1.76ry
Fy
2
E Jc  0.7 Fy S x ho 
Lr = 1.95rts 1 + 1 + 6.76  
0.7 Fy S x ho  E Jc 
12.5M max
Cb = Rm ≤ 3.0
2.5M max + 3M A + 4M B + 3M C
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 519

Design for Flexure – Ultimate Limit States for Doubly


Symmetric Compact I-Shaped Beams in Major Axis Bending

 Lateral – Torsional Buckling. Doubly symmetric sections


with Lr<Lb In this case there is elastic lateral-torsional
buckling

M n = Fcr S x ≤ M p
2
Cbπ 2 E Jc  Lb 
Fcr = 2
1 + 0.078  
 Lb  S x ho  rts 
 
 rts 
12.5M max
Cb = Rm ≤ 3.0
2.5M max + 3M A + 4 M B + 3M C

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 520

260
Design for Flexure – Ultimate Limit States for Doubly
Symmetric Compact I-Shaped Beams in Major Axis Bending

 Lb = distance between points braced against lateral


displacement of the compression flange, or between
points braced to prevent twist of the cross section
 Lp = limiting laterally unbraced length for which the
resisting moment is equal to the plastic moment
 Lr = Limiting unbraced length for which the behavior of
the beam is linear and elastic
 Cb = modification factor for non-uniform moment
diagrams

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 521

Design for Flexure – Ultimate Limit States for Doubly


Symmetric I-Shaped Beams with Compact Webs and
Noncompact or Slender Flanges in Major Axis Bending

 Failure in bending may be by:


 Lateral-Torsional Buckling
 Compression Flange Local Buckling

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 522

261
Design for Flexure – Ultimate Limit States for Doubly
Symmetric I-Shaped Beams with Compact Webs and
Noncompact or Slender Flanges in Major Axis Bending

 Lateral – Torsional Buckling (LTB). This ultimate


limit state is only applicable to members subject
to major axis bending. The design strength is
given by φbMn, where Mn is defined in the same
way as in the previous slides for compact
shapes

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 523

Design for Flexure – Ultimate Limit States for Doubly


Symmetric I-Shaped Beams with Compact Webs and
Noncompact or Slender Flanges in Major Axis Bending

 Compression Flange Local Buckling


 For sections with noncompact flanges

 λ − λ pf 
M n =  M p − ( M p − 0.7 Fy S x ) 
 λrf − λ pf 

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 524

262
Design for Flexure – Ultimate Limit States for Doubly
Symmetric I-Shaped Beams with Compact Webs and
Noncompact or Slender Flanges in Major Axis Bending

 Compression Flange Local Buckling


 For sections with slender flanges

0.9 Ekc S x
Mn =
λ2
bf
λ=
2t f
4
kc =
h tw
0.35 < kc ≤ 0.76

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 525

Design for Flexure ─ Other I-Shaped Members with


Compact or Noncompact Webs in Major Axis Bending
 Failure in bending may be by:
 Compression Flange Yielding
 Lateral-Torsional Buckling
 Inelastic
 Elastic
 Compression Flange Local Buckling
 Tension Flange Yielding

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 526

263
Design for Flexure ─ Other I-Shaped Members with
Compact or Noncompact Webs in Major Axis Bending
 Compression flange yielding

M n = R pc M yc = R pc S xc Fy

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 527

Design for Flexure ─ Other I-Shaped Members with


Compact or Noncompact Webs in Major Axis Bending
 Lateral – Torsional Buckling for sections with Lp<Lb≤Lr. In
this case there is inelastic lateral-torsional buckling

  L − Lp 
M n = Cb  Rpc M yc − ( R pc M yc − FL S xc )  b   ≤ Rpc M yc

  Lr − Lp  
S xt
If ≥ 0.7, FL = 0.7 Fy
S xc
S xt S
If < 0.7, FL = Fy xt ≥ 0.5 Fy
S xc S xc

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 528

264
Design for Flexure ─ Other I-Shaped Members with
Compact or Noncompact Webs in Major Axis Bending
 Lateral – Torsional Buckling for sections with Lr<Lb. In
this case there is elastic lateral-torsional buckling
M n = Fcr S xc ≤ R pc M yc
M yc = Fy S xc
2
Cbπ 2 E Jc  Lb 
Fcr = 2
1 + 0.078  
 Lb  S xc ho  rt 
 
 rt 
I yc
If ≤ 0.23, J = 0
Iy
E
L p = 1.1rt
Fy
2
E J F S h 
Lr = 1.95rt 1 + 1 + 6.76  L xc o 
FL S xc ho  E J 
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 529

Design for Flexure ─ Other I-Shaped Members with


Compact or Noncompact Webs in Major Axis Bending
 The web plastification factor, Rpc, is determined as
follows:

hc Mp
If ≤ λ pw , R pc =
tw M yc

hc  Mp  Mp   λ − λ pw   M p
If > λ pw , R pc =  − − 1   ≤
tw  M yc  M yc   λrw − λ pw   M yc
M p = Z x Fy ≤ 1.6 S xc Fy

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 530

265
Design for Flexure ─ Other I-Shaped Members with
Compact or Noncompact Webs in Major Axis Bending
 The effective radius of gyration for lateral-torsional
buckling, rt, is determined as follows:
For I-shapes with rectangular compression flange:
b fc
rt =
h 1 h2 
12  o + aw 
 d 6 hod 

ht
aw = c w
b fc t fc
For I-shapes with channel caps or cover plates attached to the compression flange:
rt = radius of gyration of the flange components in flexural compression plus
one-third of the web area in compression due to the application of a major axis
bending moment alone
a w = ratio of two times the web area in compression due to the application of a major
axis bending moment alone, to the area of the compression flange components
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 531

Design for Flexure ─ Other I-Shaped Members with


Compact or Noncompact Webs in Major Axis Bending
 Compression Flange Local Buckling
 For sections with noncompact flanges

 λ − λ pf 
M n =  R pc M yc − ( R pc M yc − FL S xc ) 
 λrf − λ pf 
b
λ = fc
2t fc

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 532

266
Design for Flexure ─ Other I-Shaped Members with
Compact or Noncompact Webs in Major Axis Bending
 Compression Flange Local Buckling
 For sections with slender flanges

0.9 Ekc S x
Mn =
λ2
b fc
λ=
2t fc
4
kc =
h tw
0.35 < kc ≤ 0.76
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 533

Design for Flexure ─ Other I-Shaped Members with


Compact or Noncompact Webs in Major Axis Bending
 Tension Flange Yielding
 For sections with compact webs

If S xt ≥ S xc tension flange yielding does not apply


If S xt < S xc :
M n = R pt M yt ; M yt = S xt Fy
hc M
If ≤ λ pw , R pt = p
tw M yt
hc
λ=
tw

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 534

267
Design for Flexure ─ Other I-Shaped Members with
Compact or Noncompact Webs in Major Axis Bending
 Tension Flange Yielding
 For sections with noncompact webs

If S xt ≥ S xc tension flange yielding does not apply


If S xt < S xc :
M n = R pt M yt ; M yt = S xt Fy

hc Mp  Mp  λ − λ pw   M p
> λ pw , R pt = 
 λ − λ   M
If − − 1 ≤

tw  M yt  M yt  rw pw   yt

h
λ= c
tw
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 535

Design for Flexure ─ I-Shaped Members Bent About


Their Minor Axis
 Failure in this case may be by:
 Yielding
 Flange Local Buckling
 Noncompact flanges
 Slender flanges

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 536

268
Design for Flexure ─ I-Shaped Members Bent About
Their Minor Axis
 Yielding

M ny = M py = Z y Fy ≤ 1.6 S y Fy

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 537

Design for Flexure ─ I-Shaped Members Bent About


Their Minor Axis
 Flange Local Buckling
 For sections with noncompact flanges

  λ − λ pf 
M ny =  M py − ( M py − 0.7 S y Fy )   
  λrf − λ pf
  
b
λ=
t

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 538

269
Design for Flexure ─ I-Shaped Members Bent About
Their Minor Axis
 Flange Local Buckling
 For sections with slender flanges

M ny = Fcr S y
0.69 E
Fcr = 2
 bf 
 
 2t f 
b
λ=
t
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 539

Ultimate Limit States - Shear


 The strength depends on the slenderness ratio
of the web (major axis bending) and it can be
determined based on:
 Yielding
 Inelastic shear buckling
 Elastic shear buckling

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 540

270
Ultimate Limit States - Shear
 Shear (major axis bending). If the web slenderness ratio
is small, shear failure is by yielding
 For webs of rolled I-shaped members

h E
If ≤ 2.24
tw Fyw
φvVn = φv Aw 0.6 Fyw ; φv = 1.00
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 541

Ultimate Limit States – Shear (Shear


Buckling)

Figure from Gaylord, Gaylord, and Stallmeyer’s book

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 542

271
Ultimate Limit States - Shear
 Shear (major axis bending). If the web slenderness ratio
is small, shear failure is by yielding
 For webs of other doubly symmetric shapes and singly
symmetric shapes and channels, except round HSS

h kE
If ≤ 1.10 v
tw Fy
φvVn = φv Aw 0.6 Fy ; φv = 0.90
kv = 5
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 543

Ultimate Limit States - Shear


 Shear (major axis bending). If the web slenderness ratio
is intermediate, shear failure is by inelastic buckling
 For webs of other doubly symmetric shapes and singly
symmetric shapes and channels, except round HSS

kv E h kE
1.10 ≤ ≤ 1.37 v
Fy tw Fy
 1.10 kv E Fy 
φvVn = φv Aw 0.6 Fy   ; φv = 0.90
 h tw 
 
kv = 5
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 544

272
Ultimate Limit States - Shear
 Shear (major axis bending). If the web slenderness ratio
is large, shear failure is by elastic buckling
 For webs of other doubly symmetric shapes and singly
symmetric shapes and channels, except round HSS

kv E h
1.37 <
Fyw tw
1.51Ek 
φvVn = φv 0.6 Aw  2 
v
; φv = 0.90
 ( h t w ) 
kv = 5
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 545

Ultimate Limit States – Concentrated


Forces
 For flanges and webs with concentrated forces,
failure can be by:
 Flange Local Bending (J10.1)
 Web Local Yielding (J10.2)
 Web Crippling (J10.3)
 Web Sidesway Buckling (J10.4)
 Web Compression Buckling (J10.5)
 Other design considerations are specified in Sections
J10.6 to J10.9

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 546

273
Ultimate Limit States – Concentrated
Forces
 For flanges and webs of beams with
concentrated forces, failure can be by:
 Web Local Yielding (J10.2)
 Web Crippling (J10.3)
 Web Sidesway Buckling (J10.4)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 547

Ultimate Limit States – Concentrated


Forces
 Web local yielding – Concentrated force applied at a
distance from the member end less than or equal to the
depth of the beam

φr Rn = φr ( N + 2.5k ) tw Fyw
φr Rn = φr R1 + Nφr R2
φr = 1.0
φr R1 and φr R2 from Table 9 − 4

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 548

274
Ultimate Limit States – Concentrated
Forces
 Web local yielding – Concentrated force applied at a
distance from the member end greater than the depth of
the beam

φr Rn = φr ( N + 5k ) tw Fyw
φr Rn = 2φr R1 + Nφr R2
φr = 1.0
φr R1 and φr R2 from Table 9 − 4

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 549

Ultimate Limit States – Concentrated


Forces

Figure from Salmon and Johnson’s book

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 550

275
Ultimate Limit States – Concentrated
Forces
 Web crippling – Concentrated force applied at a distance
from the member end less than or equal to d/2 and
N/d≤0.2

  tw   EFywt f
1.5
 N 
φr Rn = φr 0.40t 1 + 3     
2

 d   t f  
w
 tw
 
φr Rn = φr R3 + Nφr R4
φr = 0.75
φr R3 and φr R4 from Table 9 − 4

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 551

Ultimate Limit States – Concentrated


Forces
 Web crippling – Concentrated force applied at a distance
from the member end less than or equal to d/2 and
N/d>0.2

  tw   EFywt f
1.5
 N 
φr Rn = φr 0.40t 1 +  4 − 0.2    
2

  t f  
w
  d tw
 
φr Rn = φr R5 + Nφr R6
φr R5 and φr R6 from Table 9 − 4
φr = 0.75

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 552

276
Ultimate Limit States – Concentrated
Forces
 Web crippling – Concentrated force applied at a distance
from the member end greater than or equal to d/2

  tw   EFywt f
1.5
 N 
φr Rn = φr 0.80t 1 + 3     
2

 d   t f  
w
 tw
 
φr Rn = 2 (φr R3 + Nφr R4 )
φr R3 and φr R4 from Table 9 − 4
φr = 0.75

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 553

Ultimate Limit States – Concentrated


Forces

Figure from Gaylord, Gaylord, and Stallmeyer’s book

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 554

277
Ultimate Limit States – Concentrated
Forces
 Web sidesway buckling – Single concentrated force applied to
members where relative lateral movement between the flanges is
not restrained at the point of application of the force

If ( h tw ) ( l b f ) ≤ 2.3, compression flange restrained

Cr tw3 t f   h tw  
3

φ Rn = φ 2 1 + 0.4  
h   l b  
  f  
φ = 0.85
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 555

Ultimate Limit States – Concentrated


Forces
 Web sidesway buckling – Single concentrated force applied to
members where relative lateral movement between the flanges is
not restrained at the point of application of the force

If ( h tw ) ( l b f ) ≤ 1.7, compression flange not restrained

Cr tw3 t f   h tw  
3

φ Rn = φ 2 0.4   
h   l b f  
 
φ = 0.85
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 556

278
Ultimate Limit States – Concentrated
Forces

Figures from Gaylord, Gaylord, and Stallmeyer’s book

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 557

Ultimate Limit States – Concentrated


Forces

Figure from AISC-LRFD Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 558

279
Ultimate Limit States – Concentrated
Forces

Figure from AISC-LRFD Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 559

CV2015 DESIGN OF
STEEL MEMBERS
Session 18
Design of Laterally Supported
Beams in Bending About their Major
Axis by Elastic Analysis

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 560

280
Design Procedure
 Assuming that the W-shape is compact, which is
very likely to be the case, the design procedure
depends on the beam’s lateral support
conditions. Hence, two design conditions are
considered:
 Laterally supported beams (Lb≤Lp).
 Laterally unsupported beams (Lb>Lp).

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 561

Design Procedure
 Laterally supported beams. These are beams
that are continuously restrained against out of
plane displacements, in particular due to torsion.
This type of restraint can be provided by a
concrete slab on top of the beam with the beam
either in composite action with the slab or with
its flange embedded in the slab (Example of this
is shown in the Australian specifications where 1
cm is considered to be sufficient).

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 562

281
Design Procedure
Laterally supported beams

Reference: Salmon & Johnson

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 563

Design Procedure
 Laterally unsupported beams. These are beams
whose compression flange is not continuously
restrained against out of plane displacements
and, consequently, may be subject to lateral-
torsional buckling.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 564

282
Design Procedure
 Laterally unsupported
beams

Reference: ESDEP

Reference: Imperial College

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 565

Design Procedure
 The only difference in the design of laterally
supported beams and laterally unsupported
beams is the revision for lateral-torsional
buckling for the latter

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 566

283
Design Procedure: Laterally
Supported Beams
1. Compute the factored loads.
2. Carry out the structural analysis to obtain:
a) Shear force diagram and design shear
b) Bending moment diagram and design moment
c) Maximum concentrated forces (at the beam ends
and at intermediate points)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 567

Design Procedure: Laterally


Supported Beams
3. Make a preliminary selection based on the design moment and the
assumption that buckling does not take place (neither local nor
lateral-torsional). W-Shape is taken from Table 3-2, page 3-11 of
AISC-LRFD 2005

φb M n = φb Z x Fy = M u
Mu
Z x req ' d =
φb Fy
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 568

284
Design Procedure: Laterally
Supported Beams
4. Check the selected W-shape for local buckling either by notes in
Tables or by equations. Normally, a rolled shape is compact. In
case it is not, use the following equations:

 λ − λp 
φb M n = φb  M p − ( M p − M r )  ≥ Mu
 λr − λ p 
M p = Z x Fy M r = S x ( Fy − Fr ) Fr = 0.3Fy
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 569

Design Procedure: Laterally


Supported Beams
bf
 The slenderness ratios λ=
2t f
used in the revision of
flange local buckling λ p = 0.38
E
Fy
are, from Table B4.1 –
Unstiffened Elements λr = 1.00
E
Fy

 The slenderness ratios h


λ=
used in the revision of tw
web local buckling are, E
λ p = 3.76
from Table B4.1 – Fy
Stiffened Elements E
λr = 5.70
Fy
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 570

285
Design Procedure: Laterally
Supported Beams
5. Check the selected W-shape for shear either
by means of the equations of Chapter G or
using Table 3-2, page 3-11 of the 2005 AISC
Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 571

Design Procedure: Laterally


Supported Beams
6. Check the selected W-shape for concentrated
forces. The corresponding limit states are
shown in the following slides

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 572

286
Design Procedure: Laterally
Supported Beams
a) Flange Local Bending. This limit state is not common in
beams as it applies to tensile forces only

φ Rn = φ 6.25t 2f Fyf ; φ = 0.90

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 573

Design Procedure: Laterally


Supported Beams
b) Web Local Yielding. This limit state is always checked for both,
tension and compression concentrated forces, at the ends and at
intermediate points. Strength is obtained from Table 9-4, page 9-
38 for 50 ksi steels

φr Rn = φr R1 + N (φr R2 ) for loads at ends


φr Rn = 2φr R1 + N (φr R2 ) for loads at intermediate points

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 574

287
Design Procedure: Laterally
Supported Beams
c) Web Crippling. This limit state is checked for
compressive forces at the ends and at intermediate
points. Strength is obtained from Table 9-4, page 9-38
for 50 ksi steels

N 
φr Rn = φr R3 + N (φr R4 ) ≤ 0.2 
d 
 for loads at ends
N
φr Rn = φr R5 + N (φr R6 ) > 0.2 
d 
φr Rn = 2φr R3 + 2 N (φr R4 ) for loads at intermediate points
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 575

Design Procedure: Laterally


Supported Beams
d) Web Sidesway Buckling. This limit state
applies only to compressive single-
concentrated forces applied to members where
relative lateral movement between the loaded
compression flange and the tension flange is
not restrained at the point of application of the
concentrated force

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 576

288
Design Procedure: Laterally
Supported Beams
7. Check Serviceability Limit States. The
serviceability limit states that are checked in
beams are:
a) Deflections
b) Floor vibrations

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 577

Design Example: Laterally


Supported Beams
 Select the lightest W-shape for the continuous
beam shown in the next slide. The beam is
laterally supported and is acted upon by
concentrated forces applied at the center of
each span. The load is 5 kips (D) and 15 kips (L)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 578

289
Design Example: Laterally
Supported Beams

P P P

A B C D

8’ 8’ 12’ 12’ 10’ 10’

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 579

Solution – Factored Loads


Computation of the factored loads:

Pu = (1.2 )( 5 ) + (1.6 )(15 ) = 30 kips

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 580

290
Solution – Structural Analysis
Structural analysis for factored loads

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 581

Solution – Design Values


 Mu = 101.13 kip-ft
 Vu = 20.42 kips
 Ru = 9.94 kips (ends)
 Ru = 35.66 kips (intermediate)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 582

291
Solution – Preliminary Selection
 The selection is based on the bending moment

M u 101.130 × 12
Z x req = = = 26.97 in3
φb Fy 0.90 × 50
W 12 × 22 
 the lightest of their corresponding group
W 14 × 22 

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 583

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 584

292
Solution – Preliminary Selection
 The selected W-shape is W14x22 because:
 It has a higher moment capacity (greater value of
Zx=33.2 Vs. 29.3 in3)
 It has a higher stiffness (greater value of Ix=199 Vs.
156 in4)
All of the above for the same weight

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 585

Solution – Local Buckling


 Flange Local Buckling

bf 
λ= = 7.46 
2t f 
 λ < λ p OK
= 9.15
E
λ p = 0.38
Fy 

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 586

293
Solution – Local Buckling
 Web Local Buckling

h 
λ= = 53.3 
tw 
 λ < λ p OK
E
λ p = 3.76 = 90.55
Fy 

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 587

Solution – Check for Shear


 Shear strength is obtained directly from Table 3-2 or
Table 3-6 for 50 ksi steels

Vu = 20.42 kips 
 φ V > Vu OK
φvVn = 94.8 kips  v n

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 588

294
Solution – Check for Concentrated
Forces
 Web Local Yielding at Beam Ends

Ru = 9.94 kips 

φr R1 = 21.1 kips  φr R1 + N (φr R2 ) > Ru OK
φr R2 = 11.5 kips in 
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 589

Solution – Check for Concentrated


Forces
 Web Local Yielding at Intermediate Points

Ru = 35.66 kips 

φr R1 = 21.1 kips  2φr R1 + N (φr R2 ) > Ru OK
φr R2 = 11.5 kips in 
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 590

295
Solution – Check for Concentrated
Forces
 Web Crippling at Beam Ends

Ru = 9.94 kips 

N d ≤ 0.2 
 φ R + N (φr R4 ) > Ru OK
φr R3 = 23.1 kips  r 3
φr R4 = 2.86 kips in 
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 591

Solution – Check for Concentrated


Forces
 Web Crippling at Beam Ends

Ru = 9.94 kips

N d > 0.2 
 φ R + N (φr R6 ) > Ru OK
φr R5 = 20.4 kips  r 5
φr R6 = 3.82 kips in 
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 592

296
Solution – Check for Concentrated
Forces
 Web Crippling at Intermediate Points

Ru = 35.66 kips 

φr R3 = 23.1 kips  2 (φr R3 ) + 2 N (φr R4 ) > Ru OK
φr R4 = 2.86 kips in 
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 593

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 594


Reference: AISC Manual

297
Solution – Check for Deflections
Deflection check for service live load only

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 595

Solution – Check for Deflections


 First Span: L = 16 ft = 192 in

v perm = L 360 = 0.533 in 


 v perm > vmax OK
vmax = 0.181 in 
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 596

298
Solution – Check for Deflections
 Second Span: L = 24 ft = 288 in

v perm = L 360 = 0.800 in 


 v perm > vmax OK
vmax = 0.284 in 
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 597

Solution – Check for Deflections


 Third Span: L = 20 ft = 240 in

v perm = L 360 = 0.667 in 


 v perm > vmax OK
vmax = 0.379 in 
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 598

299
CV2015 DESIGN OF
STEEL MEMBERS
Session 19
Design of Laterally Unsupported
Beams in Bending About their Major
Axis by Elastic Analysis

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 599

Design Procedure
 The design procedure for laterally unsupported
beams includes all the steps involved in the
design of laterally supported beams plus the
revisions required by lateral-torsional buckling
 Hence, the only difference in the design of
laterally supported beams and laterally
unsupported beams is the revision for lateral-
torsional buckling for the latter

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 600

300
Design Procedure
 Laterally unsupported beams. These are beams
whose compression flange is not continuously
restrained against out of plane displacements
and, consequently, may be subject to lateral-
torsional buckling.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 601

Design Procedure
 Laterally unsupported
beams

 Compression flange of a
laterally buckled beam

Reference: Tall (Editor), 2nd Edition

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 602

301
Design Procedure: Laterally
Unsupported Beams
1. Compute the factored loads.
2. Carry out the structural analysis to obtain:
a) Shear force diagram and design shear
b) Bending moment diagram and design moment
c) Maximum concentrated forces (at the beam ends
and at intermediate points)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 603

Design Procedure: Laterally


Unsupported Beams
3. Make a preliminary selection based on the design moment and the
assumption that buckling does not take place (neither local nor
lateral-torsional). W-Shape is taken from Table 3-2 page 3-11 of
AISC-LRFD 2005

φb M n = φb Z x Fy = M u
Mu
Z x req ' d =
φb Fy
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 604

302
Design Procedure: Laterally
Unsupported Beams
4. Check the selected W-shape for local buckling either by notes in
Tables or by equations. Normally, a rolled shape is compact. In
case it is not, use the following equations:

 λ − λp 
φb M n = φb  M p − ( M p − M r )  ≥ Mu
 λr − λ p 
M p = Z x Fy M r = S x ( Fy − Fr ) Fr = 0.3Fy
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 605

Design Procedure: Laterally


Unsupported Beams
bf
 The slenderness ratios λ=
2t f
used in the revision of
flange local buckling λ p = 0.38
E
Fy
are, from Table B4.1 –
Unstiffened Elements λr = 1.00
E
Fy

 The slenderness ratios h


λ=
used in the revision of tw
web local buckling are, E
λ p = 3.76
from Table B4.1 – Fy
Stiffened Elements E
λr = 5.70
Fy
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 606

303
Design Procedure: Laterally
Unsupported Beams
5. Check the selected W-shape for lateral-
torsional buckling. To this end the beam is
divided in segments between adjacent lateral
supports. Each of these segments is checked
against lateral-torsional buckling based on the
following cases:

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 607

Design Procedure: Laterally


Unsupported Beams
For Lb ≤ L p
Failure is by plastic moment (no buckling occurs)
φb M n = φb M p = φb Z x Fy
 E 
L p = 1.76  ry
 F 
 y 

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 608

304
Design Procedure: Laterally
Unsupported Beams
For Lp < Lb ≤ Lr
Failure is by inelastic lateral-torsional buckling
 Lb − Lp 
φb M n = Cbφb  M p − ( M p − M r )  ≤ φb M p
 Lr − L p 
M r = S x ( Fy − Fr ) ; Fr = 0.3Fy
12.5M max
Cb = Rm
2.5M max + 3M A + 4 M B + 3M C

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 609

Design Procedure: Laterally


Unsupported Beams
For Lr < Lb
Failure is by elastic lateral-torsional buckling
φ M n = φ Fcr S x ≤ φ M p
2
Cbπ 2 E Jc  Lb 
Fcr = 2
1 + 0.078  
 Lb  S x ho  rts 
 
 rts 
2
E Jc  0.7 Fy S x ho 
Lr = 1.95rts 1 + 1 + 6.76  
0.7 Fy S x ho  E Jc 

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 610

305
Design Procedure: Laterally
Unsupported Beams
6. Check the selected W-shape for shear either
by means of the equations of Chapter G or
using Tables 3-2, 3-6, or 9-4 of the 2005 AISC
Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 611

Design Procedure: Laterally


Unsupported Beams
7. Check the selected W-shape for concentrated
forces. The corresponding limit states are
shown in the following slides

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 612

306
Design Procedure: Laterally
Unsupported Beams
a) Flange Local Bending. This limit state is not common in
beams as it applies to tensile forces only

φ Rn = φ 6.25t 2f Fyf ; φ = 0.90


JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 613

Design Procedure: Laterally


Unsupported Beams
b) Web Local Yielding. This limit state is always checked for both,
tension and compression concentrated forces, at the ends and at
intermediate points. Strength is obtained from Table 9-4, page 9-
38 for 50 ksi steels

φr Rn = φr R1 + N (φr R2 ) for loads at ends


φr Rn = 2φr R1 + N (φr R2 ) for loads at intermediate points

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 614

307
Design Procedure: Laterally
Unsupported Beams
c) Web Crippling. This limit state is checked for
compressive forces at the ends and at intermediate
points. Strength is obtained from Table 9-4, page 9-38
for 50 ksi steels

N 
φr Rn = φr R3 + N (φr R4 ) ≤ 0.2 
d 
 for loads at ends
N
φr Rn = φr R5 + N (φr R6 ) > 0.2 
d 
φr Rn = 2φr R3 + 2 N (φr R4 ) for loads at intermediate points

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 615

Design Procedure: Laterally


Unsupported Beams
d) Web Sidesway Buckling. This limit state
applies only to compressive single-
concentrated forces applied to members where
relative lateral movement between the loaded
compression flange and the tension flange is
not restrained at the point of application of the
concentrated force

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 616

308
Design Procedure: Laterally
Unsupported Beams
8. Check Serviceability Limit States. The
serviceability limit states that are checked in
beams are:
1. Deflections
2. Floor vibrations

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 617

Design Example: Laterally


Unsupported Beams
 Select the lightest W-shape for the continuous
beam shown in the next slide. The beam is
laterally supported only at the points of
application of concentrated forces, including the
reactions. The load system consists of
concentrated forces applied at the center of
each span. The load is 5 kips (D) and 15 kips (L)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 618

309
Design Example: Laterally
Unsupported Beams

P P P

A B C D

8’ 8’ 12’ 12’ 10’ 10’

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 619

Solution – Factored Loads


Computation of the factored loads

Pu = (1.2 )( 5 ) + (1.6 )(15 ) = 30 kips

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 620

310
Solution – Structural Analysis
Structural analysis for factored loads

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 621

Solution – Design Values


 Mu = 101.13 kip-ft
 Vu = 20.42 kips
 Ru = 9.94 kips (ends)
 Ru = 35.66 kips (intermediate)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 622

311
Solution – Preliminary Selection
 The selection is based on the bending moment

M u 101.130 × 12
Z x req = = = 26.97 in3
φb Fy 0.90 × 50
W 12 × 22 
 the lightest of their corresponding group
W 14 × 22 

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 623

Solution – Preliminary Selection


 The selected W-shape is W14x22 because:
 It has a higher moment capacity (greater value of
Zx=32.8 Vs. 29.3 in3)
 It has a higher stiffness (greater value of Ix=197 Vs.
156 in4)
All of the above for the same weight

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 624

312
Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 625

Solution – Local Buckling


 Flange Local Buckling

bf 
λ= = 7.46
2t f 
 λ < λ p OK
= 9.15
E
λ p = 0.38
Fy 

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 626

313
Solution – Local Buckling
 Web Local Buckling

h 
λ= = 53.3
tw 
 λ < λ p OK
E
λ p = 3.76 = 90.55
Fy 

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 627

Solution – Lateral-Torsional
Buckling
 Properties of the W14x22 shape for lateral-torsional
buckling, from Table 3-2, page 3-18

φb M px = 125 kip − ft φb M rx = 76.1 kip − ft


L p = 3.67 ft Lr = 10.4 ft
BF = 7.14 kips
φvVn = 94.8 kips
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 628

314
Solution – Lateral-Torsional
Buckling
 The design check for lateral-torsional buckling
involves the evaluation of all the spans defined
by the lateral braces
 To avoid checking all the spans, we determine
which spans are the critical ones and we only
check these critical spans
 To this end, in this example we compare
independently spans 1 and 6 (spans in single
curvature) and spans 2 to 5 (spans in double
curvature) because they are in similar conditions

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 629

Solution – Lateral-Torsional
Buckling
 To identify the critical spans, we should look at
the following:
 Maximum moment in the span (the greater, the more
critical is the span)
 Unbraced length of the span (the greater, the more
critical is the span)
 Cb coefficient for the span (the smaller, the more
critical is the span)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 630

315
Solution – Lateral-Torsional
Buckling
Comparison between spans 1 and 6

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 631

Solution – Lateral-Torsional
Buckling
 Comparison between spans 1 and 6 is carried
out as follows:
 With respect to the maximum bending moment, span
6 is more critical (99 kip-ft Vs. 77 kip-ft)
 With respect to the unbraced length, span 6 is more
critical (10 ft Vs. 8 ft)
 Finally, with respect to the effect of the moment
gradient, spans 1 and 6 are in similar conditions
(Cb=1.67 for both spans)
 Conclusion: between spans 1 and 6, span 6 is more
critical. Hence, we will check only span 6 for lateral-
torsional buckling
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 632

316
Solution – Lateral-Torsional
Buckling
Comparison among spans 2 to 5

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 633

Solution – Lateral-Torsional
Buckling
 Comparison among spans 2 to 5 is carried out
as follows:
 With respect to the maximum bending moment, spans
4 and 5 are more critical (101 kip-ft Vs. 87 kip-ft)
 With respect to the unbraced length, span 4 is more
critical (12 ft Vs. 10 ft)
 Finally, with respect to the effect of the moment
gradient, although all the spans have high values of
Cb, span 4 has the smallest value of Cb
 Conclusion: among spans 2 to 5, span 4 is more
critical. Hence, we will check only span 4 for lateral-
torsional buckling
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 634

317
Solution – Lateral-Torsional Buckling
 The design check for lateral-torsional buckling can be
done by looking at the required value of the Cb
coefficient and comparing this value with the actual value
of Cb based on the bending moment diagram
 The use of this approach is illustrated in the next slides
for this example

Mu
Cb req ' d =
(φb M n )C b =1

If Cb actual > Cb req ' d the selected shape is OK

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 635

Solution – Lateral-Torsional Buckling


 Design check for lateral-torsional buckling, span #4

Mu 101.13
Cb req ' d = = = 1.69
(φb M n )C b =1
60
Cb actual = 2.24 > Cb req ' d = 1.69
∴ the selected shape is OK
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 636

318
Solution – Lateral-Torsional Buckling
 Design check for lateral-torsional buckling, span #6

Mu 99.0
Cb req ' d = = = 1.25
(φ M n )C =1 79.0
b

Cb actual = 1.67 > Cb req ' d = 1.25


∴ the selected shape is OK
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 637

Solution – Lateral-Torsional
Buckling
 What follows is another way of checking lateral-torsional
buckling:
 If you wish, you can determine which span (or spans) is
(are) critical by looking at the value of the coefficient
given by

M max Lb
Coefficient =
Cb
What is your interpretation of this coefficient?

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 638

319
Solution – Lateral-Torsional
Buckling

Span Mmax MA MB MC Cb
1 77 19 38 58 1.67
2 87 36 5 46 2.25
3 87 43 0 43 2.29
4 101 39 8 54 2.24
5 101 51 1 49 2.27
6 99 25 50 74 1.67

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 639

Solution – Lateral-Torsional
Buckling
Span # Lb (ft) Mmax Cb Coefficient
1 8 77 1.67 369
2 8 87 2.25 309
3 12 87 2.29 456
4 12 101 2.24 541
5 10 101 2.27 445
6 10 99 1.67 593

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 640

320
Solution – Lateral-Torsional
Buckling
 From the preceding table we conclude that
spans 4 and 6 are the critical ones
 Each critical span will be checked for lateral-
torsional buckling in the next slides by using:
 Formulas
 Graphs (φbMn Vs. Lb)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 641

Lateral-Torsional Buckling Check:


Formulas
LTB check for span 4
Lb = 12 ft > Lr ∴ LTB may be elastic
M n = Fcr S x ≤ M p
2
Cbπ 2 E Jc  Lb 
Fcr = 2
1 + 0.078  
 Lb  S x ho  rts 
 
 rts 
2
2.24 × π 2 × 29, 000 0.208 ×1  144 
Fcr = 2
1 + 0.078   = 61.85 ksi
 144  29.0 ×13.365  1.27 
 
 1.27 
1
φb M n = 0.9 × 61.85 × 29.0 × = 134.52 kip − ft > φb M px
12
φb M n = φb M px = 125 kip − ft
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 642

321
Lateral-Torsional Buckling Check:
Graphs
LTB check for span 4
For Lb = 12 ft and Cb = 1.00
φb M n = 60.0 kip − ft from Page 3-129
φb M n = 2.24 × 60.0 = 134.40 kip − ft > φb M px
φb M n = φb M px = 125 kip − ft
or
M u 101.13
= = 45.15 kip − ft < φb M n = 60.0 kip − ft from Graph
Cb 2.24

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 643

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 644

322
Lateral-Torsional Buckling Check:
Formulas
LTB check for span 6
Lb = 10 ft < Lr ∴ LTB may be inelastic
 Lb − L p 
φb M n = Cbφb  M p − ( M p − M r )  ≤ φb M p
 Lr − L p 
  0.9 × 29 × 0.7 × 50  10 − 3.67 
φb M n = 1.67 125 − 125 −  
  12  10.4 − 3.67 
φb M n = 131.98 kip − ft > φb M px
φb M n = φb M px = 125 kip − ft

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 645

Lateral-Torsional Buckling Check:


Graphs
LTB check for span 6
For Lb = 10 ft and Cb = 1.00
φb M n = 79.0 kip − ft from Page 3-129
φb M n = 1.67 × 79.0 = 131.93 kip − ft > φb M px
φb M n = φb M px = 125 kip − ft
or
Mu 99
= = 59.28 kip − ft < φb M n = 79.0 kip − ft from Graph
Cb 1.67

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 646

323
Lateral-Torsional Buckling
 Based on the calculations for lateral-torsional
buckling strength, we conclude that the selected
W-shape, W14x22 is adequate for the beam as
far as lateral-torsional buckling is concerned

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 647

Solution – Check for Shear


 Shear strength is obtained directly from Tables 3-2, 3-6,
or 9-4 for 50 ksi steels

Vu = 20.42 kips 
 φ V > Vu OK
φvVn = 94.8 kips  v n

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 648

324
Solution – Check for Concentrated
Forces
 Web Local Yielding at Beam Ends

Ru = 9.94 kips 

φr R1 = 21.1 kips  φr R1 + N (φr R2 ) > Ru OK
φr R2 = 11.5 kips in 
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 649

Solution – Check for Concentrated


Forces
 Web Local Yielding at Intermediate Points

Ru = 35.66 kips 

φr R1 = 21.1 kips  2φr R1 + N (φr R2 ) > Ru OK
φr R2 = 11.5 kips in 
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 650

325
Solution – Check for Concentrated
Forces
 Web Crippling at Beam Ends

Ru = 9.94 kips 

N d ≤ 0.2 
 φ R + N (φr R4 ) > Ru OK
φr R3 = 23.1 kips  r 3
φr R4 = 2.86 kips in 
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 651

Solution – Check for Concentrated


Forces
 Web Crippling at Beam Ends

Ru = 9.94 kips 

N d > 0.2 
 φ R + N (φr R6 ) > Ru OK
φr R5 = 20.4 kips  r 5
φr R6 = 3.82 kips in 
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 652

326
Solution – Check for Concentrated
Forces
 Web Crippling at Intermediate Points

Ru = 35.66 kips 

φr R3 = 23.1 kips  2 (φr R3 ) + 2 N (φr R4 ) > Ru OK
φr R4 = 2.86 kips in 
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 653

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 654


Reference: AISC Manual

327
Solution – Check for Deflections
Deflection check for service live load only

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 655

Solution – Check for Deflections


 First Span: L = 16 ft = 192 in

v perm = L 360 = 0.533 in 


 v perm > vmax OK
vmax = 0.181 in 
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 656

328
Solution – Check for Deflections
 Second Span: L = 24 ft = 288 in

v perm = L 360 = 0.800 in 


 v perm > vmax OK
vmax = 0.284 in 
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 657

Solution – Check for Deflections


 Third Span: L = 20 ft = 240 in

v perm = L 360 = 0.667 in 


 v perm > vmax OK
vmax = 0.379 in 
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 658

329
Design Procedure: Compact Sections
If Lb ≤ L p If L p < Lb ≤ Lr
Failure is by plastic moment ( no LTB ) Failure may be by inelastic lateral-torsional buckling
φb M n = φb M p  Lb − L p 
φb M n = Cbφb  M p − ( M p − 0.7 S x Fy )  ≤ φb M p
 E   Lr − Lp 
L p = 1.76  ry
 F 
 y 

If Lr < Lb
Failure may be by elastic lateral-torsional buckling M p = Z x Fy M r = S x ( Fy − Fr ) Fr = 0.7 Fy
φb M n = φb Fcr S x ≤ φb M p 12.5M max
Cb = Rm ≤ 3.0
2 2.5M max + 3M A + 4 M B + 3M C
Cbπ 2 E Jc  Lb 
Fcr = 2
1 + 0.078  
 Lb  S x ho  rts 
 
 rts 
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 659

Assignment
 Select the lightest W-shape for the three-span
continuous beam shown
 Use A992 steel
 Loading conditions:
 50 kip loads = 30% (D) + 70% (L)
 20 kip load = 100% (D)
 1 kip/ft load = 20% (D) + 80% (L)
 Lateral supports @ 10 ft
 Your design should be based on the results of an elastic analysis

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 660

330
Assignment
Beam with service loads

50 kips 50 kips 20 kips 50 kips


1 k/ft

10' 20' 10' 30' 20' 15' 15'

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 661

Rules of Thumb for Beam Design


 Depth
L
 Roof beams d=
24

L
 Floor beams d=
20

L L
 Composite beams d= to
24 22
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 662

331
Rules of Thumb for Beam Design
 Cross sectional area
W ( lb ft )
 Area (in2) Ag =
3.4

W ( kg m )
 Area (cm2) Ag =
0.785

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 663

Rules of Thumb for Beam Design


 Moment of inertia
W
 Ix (in4) I x ( in 4 ) ≈ d 2 ; d ( in ) and W ( lb ft )
20

W
 Ix (cm4) Ix ≈ d 2 ; d ( cm ) and W ( kg m )
4.6

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 664

332
CV2015 DESIGN OF
STEEL MEMBERS
Session 20
Introduction to Plastic Analysis

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 665

Plastic Analysis and Design


 Plastic design is an alternate method to the
conventional design based on elastic analysis.
 It is applied to indeterminate structures such as
rigid frames, continuous beams, and, in general,
indeterminate structures that work mainly in
bending.
 Plastic design is not applied to statically
determinate structures.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 666

333
Plastic Analysis

Mp

A statically determinate structure becomes unstable when the first plastic hinge forms
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 667

Plastic Analysis

Mp

A statically indeterminate structure does not become unstable when the first plastic
hinge forms because a failure mechanism has not developed yet
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 668

334
Plastic Analysis - Factors
 The most important factors required for the
efficient use of plastic analysis are:
 Ductility of the steel
 Static indeterminacy of the structure

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 669

Plastic Analysis - Conditions


 For an elastic analysis to be correct, the
following conditions must be satisfied:
 Equilibrium. Internal actions an external loads must
be in equilibrium. This condition must be satisfied
regardless of the method of analysis
 Compatibility
 Elastic behavior. The yield stress must not be
exceeded in the entire structure

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 670

335
Plastic Analysis - Conditions
 For a plastic analysis to be correct, the
following conditions must be satisfied:
 Equilibrium. Internal actions an external loads must
be in equilibrium. As it was mentioned in the previous
slide, this condition must be satisfied regardless of
the method of analysis
 Mechanism. There must be a sufficient number of
platic hinges in the structure to create a failure
mechanism
 Plastic Moment. The plastic moment capacity of the
beam must not be exceeded in the entire structure
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 671

Plastic Analysis and Elastic


Analysis Compared
Plastic Analysis Elastic Analysis

Mechanism Compatibility

Equilibrium

Mp Plastic Moment Yielding <My

Mp Mp My My

Reference: Beedle’s book on Plastic


JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 672
Design

336
Assumptions of Simple Plastic
Theory
 First order plastic theory or Simple Plastic
Theory involve assumptions on:
 Properties of the materials.
 Loads.
 Strains.
 Deflections.
 Stability.
 Interaction between axial and shear forces with the
bending moment capacity.
 Connections.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 673

Assumptions – Material Properties


 Material is perfectly elastic-plastic.
 Properties in compression are similar to those in tension.
 Properties in bending are similar to those in direct
tension.

σ no strain hardening is assumed

σy

ε
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 674

337
Assumptions – Loads
 Loads are proportional so that all loads increase in the
same proportion. This means that the ratio between any
two loads remains constant from initial loading to the
failure of the structure

Pi
= constant for 0 ≤ P ≤ Pu
Pj

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 675

Assumptions – Strains
 The strains are proportional to the distance of
the neutral axis. This assumption must be
familiar to you because it is one of the basic
assumptions made in your Solid Mechanics I
and II courses when you studied bending

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 676

338
Assumptions – Deflections
 The deflections are small so that the formulation
of the equilibrium equations can be based on the
original, undeformed geometric configuration of
the structure. This is known as First Order
Theory

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 677

Assumptions – Stability
 There is no local buckling. This implies that the
plastic analysis and design can only be applied
to compact shapes
 There is no lateral-torsional buckling. Hence,
members must have either continuous lateral
support or lateral support conditions that permit
the development of the plastic moment capacity
before lateral-torsional buckling takes place. For
beams, this last condition means that Lb ≤ Lpd for
spans adjacent to any plastic hinge formed
before the failure mechanism was formed
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 678

339
Assumptions – Reductions in Bending
Moment Capacity
 The interaction between axial force and bending
moment does not produce any reduction in
plastic moment capacity
 The interaction between shear force and
bending moment does not produce reduction in
plastic moment capacity

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 679

Assumptions – Connections
 The connections are capable of undergoing the
rotations and transmitting the actions required
by the plastic analysis

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 680

340
Assumptions - Conclusions
 As a result of the previous assumptions, there will be
yielded zones in the structures of high ductility that
create plastic hinges in the cross sections subject to the
maximum bending moments

Mp

Plastic hinge

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 681

Theorems of the Simple Plastic


Theory
 Principle of Virtual Displacements
 Lower Bound Theorem of the Theory of
Plasticity
 Upper Bound Theorem of the Theory of
Plasticity
 Uniqueness Theorem

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 682

341
Theorems of the Simple Plastic
Theory
 Principle of virtual displacements: If a system of forces in
equilibrium is subjected to a system of virtual
displacements, the work done by the external forces
equals the work done by the internal actions
 Mathematically, this principle is written as

Wvirtual internal = Wvirtual external

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 683

Theorems of the Simple Plastic


Theory
 Lower bound theorem of the Theory of Plasticity: A
collapse load computed on the basis of an assumed
moment diagram in which the moments are nowhere
greater that Mp is less than or equal to the true collapse
load
 This theorem satisfies the conditions of equilibrium and
plastic moment. Hence, the designer must verify that the
condition of formation of a failure mechanism is satisfied.
If this last condition is not satisfied, the computed load
will be less than the actual failure load
 This theorem may yield conservative results if not
applied properly

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 684

342
Theorems of the Simple Plastic
Theory
 Upper bound theorem of the Theory of Plasticity: A
collapse load computed on the basis of an assumed
mechanism will always be greater than or equal to the
true collapse load.
 This theorem satisfies the conditions of equilibrium and
mechanism formation. Hence, the designer must verify
that the plastic moment condition is satisfied. If this last
condition is not satisfied, the computed load will be
greater than the actual failure load
 This theorem may yield unconservative results if not
applied properly

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 685

Theorems of the Simple Plastic


Theory
 Uniqueness theorem: The true collapse load is
the one that has the same upper and lower
bound solution

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 686

343
Methods of Plastic Analysis
 Kinematic method
 Equilibrium method
 Moment balance method

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 687

Methods of Plastic Analysis


 Kinematic method or mechanism method. This method is
based on the upper bound theorem. Hence, the risk of
obtaining an unconservative solution exists
 Equilibrium method or statical method. This method is
based on the lower bound theorem. Hence, a
conservative design may be obtained
 Moment balance method.
 The Kinematic method will be used here because of its
simplicity, taking care of the plastic moment condition in
order to get correct results

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 688

344
PLASTIC ANALYSIS OF BEAMS
BY THE KINEMATIC METHOD
OR MECHANISM METHOD

General Procedure of Analysis

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 689

Mechanism Method
1) Determine the number and location of the
possible plastic hinges (N). The points of
possible formation of plastic hinges are:
1) Points of maximum moment
2) Points of application of concentrated loads
3) Connections
4) Geometry changes
5) Changes of cross section
6) Points of zero shear

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 690

345
Mechanism Method
2) Determine the number of redundants in the structure
(X)
3) Determine the number of independent mechanisms in
the structure (n)

n=N−X
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 691

Mechanism Method
4) Calculate the failure load or the plastic moment
requirement for each independent mechanism. To do
this, the Principle of the Virtual Displacements is used

WE = WI
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 692

346
Mechanism Method
5) Select the different combined mechanisms and
calculate the failure load or the plastic moment
requirement for each combined mechanism. A
combined mechanism is the simultaneous
occurrence of two or more independent
mechanisms
6) Identify the failure mechanism. The failure
mechanism is the one that has the smallest
failure load (analysis) or the biggest
requirement of plastic moment (design)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 693

Mechanism Method
7) Verify the plastic moment condition for the assumed
failure mechanism. This condition states that

M ≤ Mp
or , for design,
Mu ≤ φM p

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 694

347
CV2015 DESIGN OF
STEEL MEMBERS
Session 21
Plastic Design of Laterally
Supported Beams

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 695

Design Procedure for Braced


Beams Analyzed Plastically
1. Compute the factored loads
2. Carry out the plastic analysis of the beam by the
kinematic or mechanism method. To this end, all of the
possible mechanisms should be identified in the beam
according to the general procedure of plastic analysis
by the method of mechanisms. The plastic moment
requirement of the beam is obtained from this analysis

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 696

348
Design Procedure for Braced
Beams Analyzed Plastically
3. For the failure mechanism of the previous step, verify
the plastic moment condition. By combining the results
of steps 2 and 3 the following design values are
obtained:
1. Shear force diagram
2. Bending moment diagram
3. The maximum bending moment
4. The maximum shear force
5. The maximum concentrated forces at the beam ends and at
intermediate points

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 697

Design Procedure for Braced


Beams Analyzed Plastically
4. Select the steel shape based on the plastic moment requirement
of the beam for the given loads. When making the selection, a
compact shape must be selected to avoid local buckling

φb M n = φb M p = φb Z x Fy
Mu
Z x req =
φb Fy
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 698

349
Design Procedure for Braced
Beams Analyzed Plastically
5. Check the shape selected in the previous step
by shear. This revision is made in the same
way as in the case of beams designed
elastically (see Chapter G)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 699

Design Procedure for Braced


Beams Analyzed Plastically
6. Check the shape selected for the ultimate limit states
due to the application of concentrated forces in the
same way as it was made for beams designed
elastically. These ultimate limit states include:
1. Web local yielding
2. Web crippling
3. Sidesway web buckling

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 700

350
Design Procedure for Braced
Beams Analyzed Plastically
7. Check the selected shape for the serviceability
limit states of:
1. Deflections
2. Vibrations

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 701

Design Example
 Select the lightest W section for the three-span
continuous laterally supported beam of the
figure. Use A992 steel. The 50-kip concentrated
loads are 30% dead load and 70% live load, the
20-kip concentrated load is all dead load, and
the uniform load is 20% dead load and 80% live
load

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 702

351
Design Example
Beam with service loads

50 kips 50 kips 20 kips 50 kips


1 k/ft

10' 20' 10' 30' 20' 15' 15'

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 703

Factored Loads
For the 50-kip loads:
Pu = 1.2 ×15 + 1.6 × 35 = 74.00 kips
For the 20-kip load:
Pu = 1.2 × 20 = 24.00 kips
For the uniform load:
kips
wu = 1.2 × 0.20 + 1.6 × 0.80 = 1.52
ft
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 704

352
Factored Loads

74 kips 74 kips 24 kips 74 kips


1.52 kip/ft

10' 20' 10' 30' 20' 15' 15'

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 705

Plastic Analysis – Number of


Plastic Hinges

74 kips 74 kips 24 kips 74 kips


4 1.52 kip/ft 5 6
1 2 3 7

10' 20' 10' 30' 20' 15' 15'

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 706

353
Plastic Analysis – Number of
Independent Mechanisms
 From the previous slide, there may be 7 possible plastic
hinges, the degree of static indeterminacy is 3. Hence,
the number of independent mechanisms is 4

N =7
X =3
n=N−X =4
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 707

Plastic Analysis – Mechanism No. 1

74 kips 74 kips 24 kips 74 kips


4 1.52 kip/ft 5 6
1 2 3 7
θ
3θ 4θ
10' 20' 10' 30' 20' 15' 15'

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 708

354
Plastic Analysis – Mechanism No. 1
74 kips 74 kips

10θ θ
3θ 30θ

WE = 74 (10θ + 30θ ) = 2,960θ


WI = φ M p ( 3θ + 4θ + θ ) = 8φ M pθ
φ M preq ' d = 370 kip − ft
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 709

Plastic Analysis – Mechanism No. 2

74 kips 74 kips 24 kips 74 kips


4 1.52 kip/ft 5 6
1 2 3 7

θ

10' 20' 10' 30' 20' 15' 15'

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 710

355
Plastic Analysis – Mechanism No. 2
74 kips 74 kips

10θ 3θ
θ 30θ


WE = 74 (10θ + 30θ ) = 2,960θ
WI = φ M p (θ + 4θ + 3θ ) = 8φ M pθ
φ M preq ' d = 370 kip − ft

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 711

Plastic Analysis – Mechanism No. 3

74 kips 74 kips 24 kips 74 kips


4 1.52 kip/ft 5 1.5θ 6
1 2 3 7

θ
2.5θ
10' 20' 10' 30' 20' 15' 15'

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 712

356
Plastic Analysis – Mechanism No. 3
24 kips
1.52 kip/ft

θ 30θ 1.5θ

2.5θ

1
WE = 1.52 × × 50 × 30θ + 24 × 30θ = 1,860θ
2
WI = φ M p (θ + 2.5θ + 1.5θ ) = 5φ M pθ
φ M preq ' d = 372 kip − ft

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 713

Plastic Analysis – Mechanism No. 4

74 kips 74 kips 24 kips 74 kips


4 1.52 kip/ft 5 6
1 2 3 7
θ θ

10' 20' 10' 30' 20' 15' 15'

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 714

357
Plastic Analysis – Mechanism No. 4
74 kips

θ θ
15θ

WE = 74 × 15θ = 1,110θ
WI = φ M p (θ + 2θ ) = 3φ M pθ
φ M preq ' d = 370 kip − ft
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 715

Plastic Analysis – Critical


Mechanism
 Based on the results of the plastic analysis, the
critical mechanism is mechanism No. 3 with
φbMpreq’d=372 kip-ft
 The next step is to verify the plastic moment
condition

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 716

358
Plastic Analysis – Plastic Moment
Condition
 In verifying the plastic moment condition we will
assume that the beam segments other than the
span in which the critical mechanism occurs
remain linear and elastic
 In the span where the critical mechanism occurs,
the three required conditions for a correct plastic
analysis are satisfied

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 717

Plastic Analysis – Plastic Moment


Condition

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 718

359
Plastic Analysis – Plastic Moment
Condition
 For the right span, the plastic moment condition is
satisfied because

+
M max = 369 kip − ft < φb M preq ' d = 372 kip − ft

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 719

Plastic Analysis – Plastic Moment


Condition

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 720

360
Plastic Analysis – Plastic Moment
Condition
 For the left span, it appears that the plastic moment
condition is not satisfied because

M max = 646 kip − ft > φb M preq ' d = 372 kip − ft

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 721

Plastic Analysis – Plastic Moment


Condition
 There are two possibilities:
 The assumed critical mechanism is not the actual critical
mechanism
 The assumption of the beam segments other than the critical
span remaining linear and elastic is not true
 We verify the second possibility by carrying out a linear
elastic analysis of the entire beam
 If the absolute maximum bending moment in the beam occurs at
the fixed end, we conclude that the first plastic hinge in the beam
forms at that location and, if this is the case, the bending
moment at the fixed end is equal to the critical moment
φbMp=372 kip-ft

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 722

361
Plastic Analysis – Plastic Moment
Condition

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 723

Plastic Analysis – Plastic Moment


Condition
 From the linear elastic analysis it follows that the
absolute maximum moment in the beam occurs
at the left fixed end
 Hence, since the loads are proportional it follows
directly that the first plastic hinge is formed at
the left end of the beam

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 724

362
Plastic Analysis – Plastic Moment
Condition
 Based on the results mentioned in the previous
slide, we include a plastic hinge at the left end of
the beam in addition to the plastic hinges
obtained from the plastic analysis of the beam
 The maximum positive moment in the span
where the critical mechanism occurs should be
equal to φbMp=372 kip-ft

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 725

Plastic Analysis – Plastic Moment


Condition

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 726

363
Plastic Analysis – Plastic Moment
Condition
 From the previous slide we conclude that the
plastic moment condition is satisfied
 Hence, the beam must be designed to resist a
moment of φbMp=372 kip-ft and the assumed
critical mechanism is the correct one

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 727

Plastic Analysis – Design Values

M u = 372 kip − ft
Vu = 74 kips
Ru = 74 kips for concentrated force at the end
Ru = 121.6 kips for concentrated force at intermediate points

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 728

364
Plastic Analysis – Shape Selection
 The steel shape to be used must be compact
 The required cross section plastic modulus is obtained
from the following equation

From Table 3-2, page 3-17 of the AISC Manual,


M
Zx = u
φb Fy
372 ×12
Zx = = 99.20 in3
0.90 × 50
Select W 21× 50 with Z x = 110 in3

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 729

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 730

365
Plastic Analysis – Shear Check
 From the results of the analysis, the required shear
strength is 74 kips

From page 3-17 of AISC-LRFD,


φvVn = 237 kips > Vu = 74 kips
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 731

Plastic Analysis – Concentrated


Forces
 Web local yielding at the beam end

Ru = 74 kips
From Table 9-4 of AISC Manual,
φr Rn = φr R1 + Nφr R2 = 49.2 + 19.0 N
N req ' d = 1.31 in ⇒ N = 4.00 in
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 732

366
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 733
Reference: AISC Manual

Plastic Analysis – Concentrated


Forces
 Web local yielding at intermediate points

Ru = 121.58 kips
From page 9-41 of AISC-LRFD,
φr Rn = 2φr R1 + Nφr R2 = 2 × 49.2 + 19.0 × 4
φr Rn = 174.40 kips > Ru = 121.58 kips

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 734

367
Plastic Analysis – Concentrated
Forces
 Web crippling at the beam end

Ru = 74 kips
N d = 4 20.8 = 0.19 < 0.2
φr Rn = φr R3 + Nφr R4 = 61.9 + 4 × 5.34
φr Rn = 83.26 kips > Ru = 74 kips
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 735

Plastic Analysis – Concentrated


Forces
 Web crippling at intermediate points

Ru = 121.58 kips
φr Rn = 2φr R3 + 2 Nφr R4 = 2 × 61.9 + 2 × 4 × 5.34
φr Rn = 166.52 kips > Ru = 121.58 kips

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 736

368
Plastic Analysis – Deflections

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 737

Plastic Analysis – Deflections


 Deflection check for first span (L=40 ft)

vmax = 0.8944 in
L 40 ×12
vallow = = = 1.33 in
360 360
vmax < vallow ∴ OK

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 738

369
Plastic Analysis – Deflections
 Deflection check for second span (L=50 ft)

vmax = 0.4503 in
L 50 ×12
vallow = = = 1.67 in
360 360
vmax < vallow ∴ OK

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 739

Plastic Analysis – Deflections


 Deflection check for third span (L=30 ft)

vmax = 0.6317 in
L 30 ×12
vallow = = = 1.00 in
360 360
vmax < vallow ∴ OK

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 740

370
CV2015 DESIGN OF
STEEL MEMBERS
Session 22
Plastic Design of Laterally
Unsupported Beams

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 741

Background
 So far we have used plastic design and analysis
to laterally supported beams to assure that
lateral-torsional buckling is not an issue
 However, plastic analysis and design can be
used for beams that do not have continuous
lateral supports provided that the existing lateral
support conditions are sufficient to permit the
rotations of the plastic hinges required by the
moment redistribution process

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 742

371
Background
 Moment redistribution is achieved if the distance
between lateral supports at plastic hinge
locations is such that Lb≤Lpd and in the rest of
the beam the lateral support conditions are such
that lateral-torsional buckling is not permitted
 The Lb≤Lpd requirement applies only to the
plastic hinges formed before the failure
mechanism is formed
 To identify the locations where the above
requirement applies, an elasto-plastic analysis
or sequential yielding analysis is performed
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 743

Design Procedure for Unbraced Beams


Analyzed Plastically
1. Compute the factored loads
2. Carry out the plastic analysis of the beam by the
kinematic or mechanism method. To this end, all of the
possible mechanisms should be identified in the beam
according to the general procedure of plastic analysis
by the method of mechanisms. The plastic moment
requirement of the beam is obtained from this analysis

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 744

372
Design Procedure for Unbraced Beams
Analyzed Plastically
3. For the failure mechanism of the previous step, verify
the plastic moment condition. This step is optional as
the elasto-plastic analysis is carried out in such a way
that the plastic moment condition is verified in the
process and it will yield the same design values, which
are as follows:
1. Shear force diagram
2. Bending moment diagram
3. The maximum bending moment
4. The maximum shear force
5. The maximum concentrated forces at the beam ends and at
intermediate points

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 745

Design Procedure for Unbraced Beams


Analyzed Plastically
4. Carry out an elasto-plastic analysis using the plastic
moment requirement calculated by the method of
mechanisms. The objective of this analysis is to
determine the sequence of formation of plastic hinges,
since this sequence is required to check the adequacy
of the lateral supports at points of plastic hinge
formation for moment redistribution (Lb≤Lpd ). The
steps for an elasto-plastic analysis are described later

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 746

373
Design Procedure for Unbraced Beams
Analyzed Plastically
5. Select the steel shape based on the plastic moment requirement
of the beam for the given loads as well as the lateral support
conditions at points of plastic hinge formation. The selected shape
should then satisfy the following conditions:

φb M n = φb M p = φb Z x Fy ≥ φb M p required
  M   E 
Lb ≤ L pd = 0.12 + 0.076  1     ry

  M 2    Fy 
M1
negative for single curvature
M2
M 1 is the smallest moment at the ends of Lb
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 747

Design Procedure for Unbraced Beams


Analyzed Plastically
 In the foregoing, it is understood that the revision
of Lb≤Lpd applies only to the plastic hinges that
are formed before the failure mechanism (it does
not apply to the last plastic hinge or hinges to
form). To define the sequence of formation of
plastic hinges it is necessary to make the elasto-
plastic analysis described later in this session

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 748

374
Design Procedure for Unbraced Beams
Analyzed Plastically
6. Check the selected shape for lateral-torsional
buckling in all the spans that were not checked
with the Lb≤Lpd condition. This check is done in
the same way as for beams designed by
elastic analysis

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 749

Design Procedure for Unbraced Beams


Analyzed Plastically
7. Check the shape selected in the previous step
by shear. This revision is made in the same
way as in the case of beams designed
elastically (see Chapter G)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 750

375
Design Procedure for Unbraced Beams
Analyzed Plastically
8. Check the shape selected for the ultimate limit
states due to the application of concentrated
forces in the same way as it was made for
beams designed elastically. These ultimate
limit states include:
1. Web local yielding
2. Web crippling
3. Sidesway web buckling

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 751

Design Procedure for Unbraced Beams


Analyzed Plastically
9. Check the selected shape for the serviceability
limit states of:
1. Deflections
2. Vibrations

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 752

376
Elasto-Plastic Analysis
 The elasto-plastic analysis is also referred to as
limit analysis or sequential yielding analysis
 The simplest type of limit analysis consists of a
series of elastic analyses where the
configuration of the structure is modified
according to the sequence of formation of plastic
hinges by introducing internal hinges in the
structure to assure that the bending moment at
that location will not increase as loading
continues
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 753

Elasto-Plastic Analysis
 It will be assumed that the beam segments
between plastic hinges remain elastic
 Special points of interest are the points of
possible formation of plastic hinges
 The bending moments at those points must be
monitored during the entire limit analysis

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 754

377
Elasto-Plastic Analysis
The basic procedure of a limit analysis is as
follows:
1. The first linear elastic analysis is performed
2. The bending moments at each possible
location of plastic hinge formation are
determined from the analysis
3. At each of these points, a load factor is
computed as the plastic moment obtained from
plastic analysis divided by the corresponding
bending moment

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 755

Elasto-Plastic Analysis
4. The plastic hinge occurs where the load factor
is minimum
5. The bending moments of the elastic analysis
are multiplied by the load factor to obtain the
moments at the end of the load increment
6. The reserve in moment capacity is obtained as
the difference between the moment at the end
of the load increment and the corresponding
plastic moment

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 756

378
Elasto-Plastic Analysis
7. At the point where the first plastic hinge forms,
a hinge is introduced to prevent the bending
moment to continue increasing as loading
continues in the subsequent analyses
8. A second linear analysis is carried out with the
beam in its new configuration with the hinge
introduced

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 757

Elasto-Plastic Analysis
9. At the points of possible plastic hinge
formation a new load factor is computed as the
reserve in moment capacity divided by the
increment in bending moment obtained from
the secon analysis
10. The next plastic hinge forms at the point where
the load factor is minimum
11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until a failure mechanism
forms

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 758

379
Elasto-Plastic Analysis
 If the limit analysis is to be carried out using a
commercial computer program, it is suggested
to transform all the distributed loads on the
structure to concentrated loads and perform
the steps mentioned in the foregoing slides

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 759

Design Example
 Select the lightest W section for the three-span
continuous laterally unsupported beam of the
figure. Use A992 steel. The 50-kip concentrated
loads are 30% dead load and 70% live load, the
20-kip concentrated load is all dead load, and
the uniform load is 20% dead load and 80% live
load
 Lateral supports are provided @ 10 ft

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 760

380
Design Example
Beam with service loads

50 kips 50 kips 20 kips 50 kips


1 k/ft

10' 20' 10' 30' 20' 15' 15'

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 761

Factored Loads
For the 50-kip loads:
Pu = 1.2 ×15 + 1.6 × 35 = 74.00 kips
For the 20-kip load:
Pu = 1.2 × 20 = 24.00 kips
For the uniform load:
kips
wu = 1.2 × 0.20 + 1.6 × 0.80 = 1.52
ft
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 762

381
Factored Loads
Beam with factored loads

74 kips 74 kips 24 kips 74 kips


1.52 kip/ft

10' 20' 10' 30' 20' 15' 15'

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 763

Plastic Analysis – Number of


Independent Mechanisms
 From the previous slide, there may be 7 possible plastic
hinges, the degree of static indeterminacy is 3 and the
number of independent mechanisms is 4

N =7
X =3
n=N−X =4
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 764

382
Plastic Analysis – Number of
Plastic Hinges

74 kips 74 kips 24 kips 74 kips


4 1.52 kip/ft 5 6
1 2 3 7

10' 20' 10' 30' 20' 15' 15'

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 765

Plastic Analysis – Mechanism No. 1

74 kips 74 kips 24 kips 74 kips


4 1.52 kip/ft 5 6
1 2 3 7
θ
3θ 4θ
10' 20' 10' 30' 20' 15' 15'

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 766

383
Plastic Analysis – Mechanism No. 1
74 kips 74 kips

10θ θ
3θ 30θ

WE = 74 (10θ + 30θ ) = 2,960θ


WI = φ M p ( 3θ + 4θ + θ ) = 8φ M pθ
φ M preq ' d = 370 kip − ft
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 767

Plastic Analysis – Mechanism No. 2

74 kips 74 kips 24 kips 74 kips


4 1.52 kip/ft 5 6
1 2 3 7

θ

10' 20' 10' 30' 20' 15' 15'

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 768

384
Plastic Analysis – Mechanism No. 2
74 kips 74 kips

10θ 3θ
θ 30θ


WE = 74 (10θ + 30θ ) = 2,960θ
WI = φ M p (θ + 4θ + 3θ ) = 8φ M pθ
φ M preq ' d = 370 kip − ft

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 769

Plastic Analysis – Mechanism No. 3

74 kips 74 kips 24 kips 74 kips


4 1.52 kip/ft 5 1.5θ 6
1 2 3 7

θ
2.5θ
10' 20' 10' 30' 20' 15' 15'

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 770

385
Plastic Analysis – Mechanism No. 3
24 kips
1.52 kip/ft

θ 30θ 1.5θ

2.5θ

1
WE = 1.52 × × 50 × 30θ + 24 × 30θ = 1,860θ
2
WI = φ M p (θ + 2.5θ + 1.5θ ) = 5φ M pθ
φ M preq ' d = 372 kip − ft

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 771

Plastic Analysis – Mechanism No. 4

74 kips 74 kips 24 kips 74 kips


4 1.52 kip/ft 5 6
1 2 3 7
θ θ

10' 20' 10' 30' 20' 15' 15'

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 772

386
Plastic Analysis – Mechanism No. 4
74 kips

θ θ
15θ

WE = 74 × 15θ = 1,110θ
WI = φ M p (θ + 2θ ) = 3φ M pθ
φ M preq ' d = 370 kip − ft
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 773

Plastic Analysis – Critical


Mechanism
 Based on the results of the plastic analysis, the
critical mechanism is mechanism No. 3 with
φbMpreq’d=372 kip-ft
 The next step is to verify the plastic moment
condition. This will be done by means of an
elasto-plastic analysis to determine the
sequence of plastic hinge formation

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 774

387
Plastic Analysis – Elasto-Plastic
Analysis

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 775

Plastic Analysis – Elasto-Plastic


Analysis

First Load Increment


Plastic Hinge No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Moment increment (k-ft) 586.23 177.19 224.03 492.55 281.15 443.05 333.48
Load Factor 0.6346 2.0994 1.6605 0.7553 1.3231 0.8396 1.1155
Minimum load factor = 0.6346
First plastic hinge forms at location 1
Modified Moment (k-ft) 372.00 112.44 142.16 312.55 178.41 281.14 211.61
Accummulated moment (k-ft) 372.00 112.44 142.16 312.55 178.41 281.14 211.61
Reserve Moment Capacity
(k-ft) 0.00 259.56 229.84 59.45 193.59 90.86 160.39
Accummulated load factor = 0.6346

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 776

388
Plastic Analysis – First Plastic
Hinge

74 kips 74 kips 24 kips 74 kips


4 1.52 k/ft 5 6
1 2 3 7

10' 20' 10' 30' 20' 15' 15'

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 777

Plastic Analysis – Elasto-Plastic


Analysis

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 778

389
Plastic Analysis – Elasto-Plastic
Analysis

Second Load Increment


Plastic Hinge No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Moment increment (k-ft) 0.00 581.20 263.60 635.20 250.84 398.47 355.77
Load Factor NA 0.4466 0.8719 0.0936 0.7718 0.2280 0.4508
Minimum load factor = 0.0936
Second plastic hinge forms at location 4
Modified Moment (k-ft) 0.00 54.39 24.67 59.45 23.47 37.29 33.29
Accummulated moment (k-ft) 372.00 166.83 166.83 372.00 201.88 318.43 244.91
Reserve Moment Capacity
(k-ft) 0.00 205.17 205.17 0.00 170.12 53.57 127.09
Accummulated load factor = 0.7282

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 779

Plastic Analysis – Second Plastic


Hinge

74 kips 74 kips 24 kips 74 kips


4 1.52 k/ft 5 6
1 2 3 7

10' 20' 10' 30' 20' 15' 15'

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 780

390
Plastic Analysis – Elasto-Plastic
Analysis

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 781

Plastic Analysis – Elasto-Plastic


Analysis

Third Load Increment


Plastic Hinge No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Moment increment (k-ft) 0.00 740.00 740.00 0.00 385.82 596.97 256.52
Load Factor NA 0.2773 0.2773 NA 0.4409 0.0897 0.4955
Minimum load factor = 0.0897
Third plastic hinge forms at location 6
Modified Moment (k-ft) 0.00 66.40 66.40 0.00 34.62 53.57 23.02
Accummulated moment (k-ft) 372.00 233.23 233.23 372.00 236.50 372.00 267.92
Reserve Moment Capacity
(k-ft) 0.00 138.77 138.77 0.00 135.50 0.00 104.08
Accummulated load factor = 0.8179

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 782

391
Plastic Analysis – Third Plastic
Hinge

74 kips 74 kips 24 kips 74 kips


4 1.52 k/ft 5 6
1 2 3 7

10' 20' 10' 30' 20' 15' 15'

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 783

Plastic Analysis – Elasto-Plastic


Analysis

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 784

392
Plastic Analysis – Elasto-Plastic
Analysis

Fourth Load Increment


Plastic Hinge No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Moment increment (k-ft) 0.00 740.00 740.00 0.00 744.00 0.00 555.00
Load Factor NA 0.1875 0.1875 NA 0.1821 NA 0.1875
Minimum load factor = 0.1821
Fourth plastic hinge forms at location 5
Modified Moment (k-ft) 0.00 134.77 134.77 0.00 135.50 0.00 101.08
Accumulated moment (k-ft) 372.00 368.00 368.00 372.00 372.00 372.00 369.00
Reserve Moment Capacity
(k-ft) 0.00 4.00 4.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 3.00
Accummulated load factor = 1.0000

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 785

Plastic Analysis – Fourth Plastic


Hinge

74 kips 74 kips 24 kips 74 kips


4 1.52 k/ft 5 6
1 2 3 7

10' 20' 10' 30' 20' 15' 15'

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 786

393
Plastic Analysis – Results of
Elasto-Plastic Analysis

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 787

Plastic Analysis – Plastic Moment


Condition

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 788

394
Plastic Analysis – Plastic Moment
Condition
 From the previous slide we observe that the limit
analysis yields the same results as the
verification of the plastic moment condition

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 789

Plastic Analysis – Design Values

M u = 372 kip − ft
Vu = 74 kips
Ru = 74 kips for concentrated force at the end
Ru = 121.6 kips for concentrated force at intermediate points

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 790

395
Plastic Analysis – Shape Selection
 The steel shape to be used must be compact
 The required cross section plastic modulus is obtained
from the following equation

From page 3-17 of AISC manual,


M
Zx = u
φb Fy
372 ×12
Zx = = 99.20 in3
0.90 × 50
Select W 21× 50 with Z x = 110 in3

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 791

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 792

396
Plastic Analysis – Spans to Check by
Rotation Capacity and LTB

74 kips 74 kips 24 kips 74 kips


1.52 kip/ft

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

10' 20' 10' 30' 20' 15' 15'

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 793

Plastic Analysis – Spans to Check


 Spans to be checked with the condition Lb≤Lpd
(those adjacent to all the plastic hinges but the
last one to form):
 1, 4, 5, 9, and 10
 Spans to be checked by normal Lateral-
Torsional Buckling:
 2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 11, and 12

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 794

397
Plastic Analysis – Spans to Check by
Lb≤Lpd

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 795

Plastic Analysis - Lb≤Lpd Check


 Revision of span No. 1
 Lb = 10 ft = 120 in

M 1 = 368 kip − ft ; M 2 = 372 kip − ft


  368    29, 000 
L pd =  0.12 + 0.076     (1.30 ) = 147.17 in
  372    50 
Lb < L pd OK
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 796

398
Plastic Analysis - Lb≤Lpd Check
 Revision of span No. 4
 Lb = 10 ft = 120 in

M 1 = 368 kip − ft ; M 2 = 372 kip − ft


  368    29, 000 
L pd =  0.12 + 0.076     (1.30 ) = 147.17 in
  372    50 
Lb < L pd OK
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 797

Plastic Analysis - Lb≤Lpd Check


 Revision of span No. 5
 Lb = 10 ft = 120 in

M 1 = 28 kip − ft ; M 2 = 372 kip − ft


  28    29, 000 
L pd =  0.12 + 0.076     (1.30 ) = 94.79 in
  372    50 
Lb > L pd NG
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 798

399
Plastic Analysis - Lb≤Lpd Check
 Revision of span No. 9
 Lb = 10 ft = 120 in

M 1 = 76 kip − ft ; M 2 = 372 kip − ft


  76    29, 000 
Lpd =  0.12 + 0.076     (1.30 ) = 102.19 in
  372    50 
Lb > L pd NG
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 799

Plastic Analysis - Lb≤Lpd Check


 Revision of span No. 10
 Lb = 10 ft = 120 in

M 1 = 122 kip − ft ; M 2 = 372 kip − ft


  122    29, 000 
Lpd =  0.12 + 0.076     (1.30 ) = 109.27 in
  372    50 
Lb > L pd NG
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 800

400
Plastic Analysis – Spans to Check by LTB

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 801

Plastic Analysis – Spans to Check by LTB


 By inspection, the critical spans are spans 2 and
3
 For these spans
 Mu = 368 kip-ft
 Cb = 1.0
 φbMn = 314 kip-ft from AISC-LRFD page 3-121
 φbMn < Mu → NG

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 802

401
Plastic Analysis - Assignment
 It is left to the student to find the lightest W-shape for this
case and compare it with the lightest W-shape that we
would obtain if the selection was based on an elastic.
Draw your own conclusions for this case
 In what follows, the rest of the design checks are done
just for illustrative purposes, eventhough the selected
shape is not adequate

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 803

Plastic Analysis – Shear Check


 From the results of the analysis, the required shear
strength is 74 kips

From page 3-17 of AISC-LRFD,


φvVn = 237 kips > Vu = 74 kips
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 804

402
Plastic Analysis – Concentrated
Forces
 Web local yielding at the beam end

Ru = 74 kips
From page 9-44 of AISC-LRFD,
φr Rn = φr R1 + Nφr R2 = 49.2 + 19.0 N
N req ' d = 1.31 in ⇒ N = 4.00 in
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 805

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 806


Reference: AISC Manual

403
Plastic Analysis – Concentrated
Forces
 Web local yielding at intermediate points

Ru = 121.58 kips
From page 9-44 of AISC-LRFD,
φr Rn = 2φr R1 + Nφr R2 = 2 × 49.2 + 19.0 × 4
φr Rn = 174.40 kips > Ru = 121.58 kips

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 807

Plastic Analysis – Concentrated


Forces
 Web crippling at the beam end

Ru = 74 kips
N d = 4 20.8 = 0.19 < 0.2
φr Rn = φr R3 + Nφr R4 = 61.9 + 4 × 5.34
φr Rn = 83.26 kips > Ru = 74 kips
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 808

404
Plastic Analysis – Concentrated
Forces
 Web crippling at intermediate points

Ru = 121.58 kips
φr Rn = 2φr R3 + 2 Nφr R4 = 2 × 61.9 + 2 × 4 × 5.34
φr Rn = 166.52 kips > Ru = 121.58 kips

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 809

Plastic Analysis – Deflections

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 810

405
Plastic Analysis – Deflections
 Deflection check for first span (L=40 ft)

vmax = 0.8944 in
L 40 × 12
vallow = = = 1.33 in
360 360
vmax < vallow ∴ OK
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 811

Plastic Analysis – Deflections


 Deflection check for second span (L=50 ft)

vmax = 0.4503 in
L 50 ×12
vallow = = = 1.67 in
360 360
vmax < vallow ∴ OK
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 812

406
Plastic Analysis – Deflections
 Deflection check for third span (L=30 ft)

vmax = 0.6317 in
L 30 ×12
vallow = = = 1.00 in
360 360
vmax < vallow ∴ OK
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 813

Design of Steel Members

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 814

407
CV2015 DESIGN OF
STEEL MEMBERS
INTRODUCTION TO COMPOSITE
DESIGN

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 815

INTRODUCTION TO
COMPOSITE BEAM DESIGN
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 816

408
Introduction to Composite Design
 A composite structural system or member is that in
which there are two different materials working
together to resist the loads
 In order for the composite system to work properly
each material must work in the most efficient way.
Example:
 Steel in tension
 Concrete in compression
 In this course we will cover only composite beams

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 817

Introduction to Composite Design

Reference: Sabnis, 1979

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 818

409
Introduction to Composite Design

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 819

Introduction to Composite Design

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 820

410
Diseño de Estructuras de Acero

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 821

Composite Design
 Examples of composite
systems:
 Floor system based on:
 Steel shapes
 Concrete slab
 Floor system based on:
 Steel shapes
 Steel deck
 Concrete slab

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 822

411
Early Research
 United Kingdom
 Scott (1925).
 Caughey y Scott (1929).
 Johnson (1966).
 Canada
 MacKay et al. (1923).
 United States
 Siess (1949).
 Fisher (1970).
 Slutter (1974).

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 823

Structural Steel Weight Reduction in a Three-


Bay, Six-Floor Building (Johnson, 1966)
Type of design Weight (%) Cost (%)

Elastic, non- 100 100


composite
Elastic, 95 102
composite
Plastic, non- 86 91
composite
Plastic, 66 90
composite
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 824

412
Structural Steel Weight Reduction in Simply
Supported Bridges From 9m to 27m (Siess,
1949)
Type of beam Relative weight (%)

Rolled shape, non-composite 100


Symmetric rolled shape, composite:
Without coverplates
- Unshored 92
- Shored 77
With coverplates
- Unshored 76
- Shored 64
Unsymmetric rolled shape, composite:
- Unshored 82
Welded shape, composite:
- Unshored 69
- Shored 40-60
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 825

Structural Steel Weight reduction in Continuous


Bridges, Three 32m Spans (Iwamota, 1962)
Type of beam Weight (%) Cost (%)

Non-composite 100 100

Composite 87 92

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 826

413
Composite Design
 Advantages:
 Structural steel weight reduction (10% - 20% weight
savings)
 Steel shapes with smaller depth
 Increment in floor stiffness
 Increment in the span length for a given shape

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 827

Introduction to Composite Design


 Disadvantages:
 Different stiffness in the regions of positive and negative
moments. (In general it is considered acceptable to
assume equal stiffness in both regions based on the
moment of inertia of the composite section for positive
moment)
 If the dead load is high, long-term deflections may be
important
 Different construction teams (concrete and steel)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 828

414
Composite Construction Methods
 Shored
 The composite section resists all the loads
 Unshored
 The steel shape alone resists the weight of the slab
plus the construction loads
 The composite section resists the superimposed dead
load plus the live load

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 829

Shored Construction
 Advantages:
 Steel shapes with smaller depths to resist the
construction loads and control deflections
 Camber is not required
 Avoids increase in concrete volume due to the
deflection of the beam

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 830

415
Shored Construction
 Disadvantages:
 Complicates the construction process
 Increases the cost due to installation and removal of
shoring
 It is more susceptible to creep related deflections
 The instantaneous deflection when shoring is
removed increases the negative moment at the
supports thus increasing cracking potential in the slab

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 831

Influence of the Constrution


Method on the Strength
 The construction method (shored or unshored)
does not affect the load carrying capacity of the
composite beam
 However, there exist differences in the stress
values for service loads

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 832

416
Composite Beam Design
 Composite action develops between the
concrete slab and the steel beam
 That composite action between the slab and the
beam is developed because of the shear
connectors that make both elements to work as
a unit

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 833

Composite Beam Design


 Ultimate limit states:
 Bending moment capacity
 Shear capacity
 Serviciability limit states
 Deflections
 Vibrations
 Additional design considerations:
 Design of shear connections
 Partial composite action

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 834

417
Composite Beam Design
 The structural design of a composite floor system is carried
out in a way very similar to the design of reinforced concrete
T-beams
 Composite beams are analized using the concept of
transformed area

Es
n=
Ec
Es = 29, 000 ksi
Ec = γ1.5
c f c' ; f c' en ksi
Ec = 1, 750 f c' for normal weight concrete

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 835

Composite Beam Design


 To take into account
the effect of shear lag
an effective weight of
the concrete slab
needs to be considered

Reference: Salmon, Johnson, and Malhas

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 836

418
Composite Beam Design

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 837

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 838

419
Introduction
 This presentation was developed as a teaching aid with the support of the American Institute of
Steel Construction. Its objective is to provide technical background and information for composite
construction and cambering. The information provided is based on common design and
construction practices for structures of twelve stories or less.

 The AISC Digital Library case study presentations document the construction of a steel frame for
an office building. The case study includes photographs that were taken throughout the
construction of the structural steel frame including detailing, fabrication, and erection. Project data
including plans, schedules, specifications and other details are also included. The case study
presentations are available in the Learning Opportunities section at www.aisc.org.

 This presentation goes a step further in detail in the areas of composite construction and
cambering. A more in-depth background is provided and impacts of the details and design
choices on schedule, cost, sequence and overall project management are addressed.

 The information is presented with concerns of a construction manager or general contractor in


mind.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 839

What Will You Gain From This


Presentation?
 General knowledge of structural steel

 Knowledge of the details of composite steel construction, the components


that are used, and how they are installed

 An understanding of the impacts that composite steel construction may


have on project schedule, cost, sequence and overall management

 Insight into the process of creating camber and why cambered beams are
used

 Familiarity with situations where cambered beams should and should not be
used, and how using cambered beams might affect a project

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 840

420
Benefits of Structural Steel
 Some benefits associated with use of structural steel for owners are:
• Steel allows for reduced frame construction time and the ability to construct in all seasons
• Steel makes large spans and bay sizes possible, providing more flexibility for owners
• Steel is easier to modify and reinforce if architectural changes are made to a facility over its life
• Steel is lightweight and can reduce foundation costs
• Steel is durable, long-lasting and recyclable (AISC 1999)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 841

Unique Aspects of Steel Construction

Procurement and management of structural steel is similar to other materials, but there are some
unique aspects to steel construction:
• Steel is fabricated off-site (above left)
• On-site erection is a rapid process (above right)
• This gives use of structural steel some scheduling advantages
• Coordination of all parties is essential for achieving potential advantages (AISC 1999)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 842

421
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 843

Introduction to Composite
Construction

• A steel beam which is made composite by using shear connectors, composite metal
decking and concrete is much stronger and stiffer than the base beam alone
• Composite floor systems are considered by many to be the highest quality type of
construction
• This has become a standard type of construction selected by many architects,
engineers, and developers (AISC 1991)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 844

422
Advantages of Composite Construction

 In a composite floor system the concrete acts together with the steel to create a
stiffer, lighter, less expensive structure (Allen 1999)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 845

Advantages of Composite Construction

Connecting the concrete to the steel beams can have several advantages:
• It is typical to have a reduced • Shallower beams may be used which
structural steel frame cost might reduce building height
• Weight of the structural steel frame • Increased span lengths are possible
may be decreased which may
• Stiffer floors
reduce foundation costs
• Reduced live load deflections
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 846

423
Disadvantages of Composite
Construction

• The additional subcontractor needed for shear connector installation will increase
field costs
• Installation of shear connectors is another operation to be included in the schedule
• A concrete flatwork contractor who has experience with elevated composite slabs
should be secured for the job
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 847

Metal Decking

• Composite decking works together with the concrete fill to make a stiff, light-weight, economical
floor system
• Compare the composite decking (above left), non-composite decking (above center), and the form
decking (above right)
• Composite decking is available in various profiles and thicknesses
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 848

424
Composite Metal Decking

• Decking with deformed ribs (or embossed decking), as shown, is commonly used
• The deformations on the ribs allow for a stronger bond between the concrete and the
decking (ASCE 2002)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 849

Composite Metal Decking

Less common styles of composite decking include:


• Decking with the ribs formed in a dovetail or fluted pattern (above)
• Decking with welded wire fabric welded to the ribs
• Decking with steel rods welded across the ribs
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 850

425
Installation of Decking

• Metal decking is placed on the structural steel at predetermined points in the erection sequence
• Metal decking may be installed by the steel erection contractor or a separate decking contractor

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 851

Installation of Decking

• Per the Occupational Safety & Health Administration Standard 1926.760(c) the decking crew may
work in a controlled decking zone while placing and attaching the decking
• A controlled decking zone is an area in which initial installation and placement of metal decking
may take place without the use of guardrail systems, personal fall arrest systems, fall restraint
systems, or safety net systems and where access to the zone is controlled

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 852

426
Installation of Decking

• Puddle welds (above right) are commonly used to attach the decking to the structural steel below
• Daily output for a four person decking crew ranges from 2700 S.F. to 3860 S.F. per day
depending on the depth and gauge of the decking (Means 2004)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 853

Installation of Decking

• As an alternative to welding, powder actuated tools may be


used to attach metal decking to structural steel
• Powder actuated tools use the expanding gases from a
powder load, or booster, to drive a fastener
• A nail-like fastener is driven through the metal deck into the
steel beam
• The powder actuated tool, powder load, and fastener must be
matched to the thickness of the structural steel beam flanges
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 854

427
Shear Connectors

• Shear connectors are commonly referred to


as “studs” or “shear studs” in the trade
• They are available in a range of sizes,
materials, and grades
• Headed studs (as shown) are most
commonly used
• Other, less common options for shear
connectors include hooked studs or pieces
of C-channel

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 855

Shear Connectors

• Depending on the welding process used, the tip of the


shear connector may be placed in a ceramic ferrule (arc
shield) during welding to retain the weld
• Shear connectors create a strong bond between the steel
beam and the concrete floor slab which is poured on top of
the metal decking
• This bond allows the concrete slab to work with the steel
beams to reduce live load deflection
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 856

428
Installation of Shear Connectors

• Shear connectors are installed after the decking is in place


• Shear connectors may be installed by the steel erection contractor or a specialty shear connector
installer
• The welding equipment required for installation is provided by the shear connector installer
• Daily output for shear connector installation averages about 1000 per day depending on the size
of the connectors (Means 2004)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 857

Installation of Shear Connectors

• The bracketed numbers on the drawing above give the number of shear studs to be installed at an
even spacing on the respective beam
• When spacing is not uniform it will be indicated on the plan
• Specified spacing of the shear connectors is an important part of the composite design and must
be adhered to
• Minimum spacing keep concentrations of compressive forces from occurring at the stud locations
• Maximum spacing help avoid separation of the slab from the beam and guarantee the uniform
transfer of shear force (RLSD 2002)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 858

429
Installation of Shear Connectors

• The electrical arc process is commonly used for stud welding


 An arc is drawn between the stud and the base metal
 The stud is plunged into the molten steel which is contained by the ceramic ferrule
 The metal solidifies and the weld is complete
• The ferrules are removed before the concrete is poured
(ASCE 2002, AWS 2004)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 859

Installation of Concrete

• Concrete is installed by a concrete contractor on top of the composite metal decking, shear
connectors, and welded wire fabric or rebar grid (crack control reinforcing)
• Pumping is a typical installation method for concrete being placed on metal decking
• 10,000 to 15,000 sq. ft. of concrete slab may be installed per day depending on slab thickness
and crew size (Ruddy 1986)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 860

430
Installation of Concrete

• There is an art to the placement of concrete on metal deck and structural steel
• The work, unless shoring is used, must be executed on a deflecting surface
• An experienced concrete contractor should be employed for this work
 Concrete should be deposited over supporting members first, then spread toward the deck
midspans
 The accumulation of a deep pile of concrete must be avoided

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ (AISC 2003, ASCE 2002) 861

Installation of Concrete

• Concrete construction joints should be located over the beam or girder webs
• Sometimes this is not possible and the joint is located near the decking midspan
• Shoring should be placed beneath the construction joints until the concrete on both sides of the
construction joint has reached 75% strength
• This avoids a bond failure between the hardened concrete and the metal deck when the adjoining
concrete is placed (ASCE 2002)
• Placement of construction joints must be reviewed by the Engineer of Record
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 862

431
Installation of Concrete

• The contractor must be aware of camber in the beams and the expected deflections
• Consultation with the structural engineer may be necessary
• As the concrete cures it forms a connection with the composite metal decking and shear studs
• The composite floor system is now complete
(AISC 2003)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 863

Quality Control

• The shear connectors used in composite construction require specific inspections and quality
control
• Testing procedures are specified in the contract documents or by a local building authority
• AWS D1.1 – Structural Welding Code – Steel, Section 7: Stud Welding (AWS 2004) specifies the
tests and inspections for shear studs
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 864

432
Quality Control

• As described in the AWS code (AWS 2004), jobsite conditions may exist that prohibit or delay the
stud welding operation
• The primary issues affecting the installation of the shear connectors are:
 Moisture on the decking or ferrules
 Moisture between the decking and the steel beam below
 A steel temperature below 0° F
• In the pictures above, a torch is being used to remove snow (left) from the areas where shear
studs are to be installed (right)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 865

Quality Control

• Required quality control procedures for shear connectors include


pre-production tests and fabrication inspections
 Pre-production testing is performed by the shear stud installer at the beginning of each
work shift and includes the following steps:

1. Weld two sample studs 3. Perform bending test


2. Inspect for flash 4. Equipment settings are recorded

 The stud installer performs visual fabrication inspections as studs are installed
 Other testing may be specified or may be necessary if all visual inspections are not passed
(SIN 1998)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 866

433
Cost Impacts of Composite
Construction

 When used appropriately, typical overall building costs will be less for composite
construction than non-composite construction
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 867

Cost Impacts of Composite


Construction

• The U.S. national average installation cost for shear studs ranges from $1.15 to $1.72
per connector (Means 2004)
• A cost comparison should be made between the reduced structural steel cost and the
additional shear connector cost when determining whether or not to use composite
construction

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 868

434
Scheduling of Composite
Construction

• The duration for the installation of shear studs is project dependent and should be
considered on a project by project basis
• Shear stud installation usually has little or no impact on the overall project schedule

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 869

Scheduling of Composite
Construction

• It may be possible, depending on the size of the structure and the sequencing of
erection and decking, to install the shear studs as erection proceeds
• It may also be possible to have a majority of the shear connectors in place and begin
placing concrete for the floor slabs while structural steel is being erected in another
area of the building
• On the structure shown above part of the composite first floor slab was placed while
erection of the structural steel for the third floor proceeded

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 870

435
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 871

Image courtesy of CAMBCO Inc.

Introduction to Cambering

Image courtesy of CAMBCO Inc.

 Cambering is the process of creating an intentional slight curvature in a beam


JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 872

436
Introduction to Cambering

• Camber in a beam can be designed to compensate for either:


 A certain percentage of the dead load deflection
 The full dead load deflection
 The full dead load deflection as well as a percentage of the live load deflection
(Ricker 1989)
 Camber is usually designed to compensate for deflections caused by pre-composite dead
loads
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 873

Advantages of Cambering

• Supporting beams will deflect under the load of concrete being placed
• This deflection can be exaggerated in a composite floor system where the full strength of the
system is not achieved until the concrete has cured
• Cambered beams (top diagram above) should deflect to a straight line (bottom diagram above), if
load and deflection are predicted accurately and camber equals deflection
 This allows the floor slab to be flat while maintaining a consistent thickness
(Larson and Huzzard 1990)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 874

437
Advantages of Cambering

• If beams are not cambered (top diagram above) the deflection under the load of the wet (plastic)
concrete will result in a ponding effect in the concrete (bottom diagram above)
• To create a flat floor in this situation the concrete will need to be thicker at the center of the bay
where the deflection is the greatest
• The volume of concrete used will typically be 10-15% more than if the floor is a constant thickness
(ASCE 2002)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 875

Disadvantages of Cambering

• The use of cambered beams will, to a certain degree, be limited by other aspects of
the design for a structure
• Due to the complexity in detailing, fabrication, and fit-up associated with moment
connections (above left), camber should not be used in moment connected beams
• Beams with simple framing connections (above right) may be cambered because the
end rotational resistance of a simple connection is small in comparison to that of a
moment connection

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 876

438
Disadvantages of Cambering

Specified Top Of
Slab Elevation

2
• The processes used to create camber in beams as well as the actual deflections under load of
cambered beams are not exact
• Care needs to be taken in the specification and fabrication of camber to ensure that a beam, once
in place and under load, will perform within tolerances
• Levelness and consistent floor thickness can be a problem (ASCE 2002)
• The diagrams above show two possible results of cambered beams not deflecting as predicted
under the load of the wet (plastic) concrete
1. Stud heads are exposed 2. Top of slab elevation out of tolerance
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 877

Alternatives to Cambering

1 2

 Alternative methods for


achieving a level floor slab
without using cambered
3
beams include:
1. Pouring a slab of varying Shoring
thickness over deflecting
beams Concrete At
2. Using over-sized beams 75% Strength
to minimize deflection
3. Shore the beams before
placing the concrete
 (Larson and Huzzard
1990)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 878

439
Shoring

• Shoring may be used in lieu of cambering


• The construction documents must specify the use of shoring
• There are several advantages to using shoring:
 Lighter floor beams may be used
 Cambers do not need to be designed or fabricated
 Less beam deflection allows for better control of the slab thickness
 Shoring can accommodate a contractor’s special loading requirements
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 879

When to Camber

• Girder Beams • Filler Beams


• Members with uniform cross section • Composite Floor Beams
(Ricker 1989)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 880

440
When not to Camber

• Cantilevered Beams (above left) • Braced Beams (above right)


• Crane Beams • Spandrel Beams (above right)
• Moment Connected Beams (Ricker 1989)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 881

When not to Camber

• Beams with moment connections • Beams under 20 feet in length (above


(above left) right)
• Beams with non-symmetrical loading • Beams with end plate connections
(Ricker 1989)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 882

441
Heat Cambering

• Beams may be cambered by applying heat


to small wedge-shaped areas at specific
increments along the beam (Ricker 1989)
• The beam is place upside down on supports
so the “bottom” flange can be heated
• The heated flange expands under the heat
and contracts as it cools
• Camber is induced in the opposite side of
the beam as the heated flange cools
• Advancing this slide will begin an animation
which shows the expansion and contraction
that occurs in a heat cambered beam
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 883

Installation of Heat Cambered Beams

• A heat cambered beam should be erected with the heat marks on the bottom side of
the beam (see top diagram above)
 This places the beam in a camber up (or concave down) orientation
• Heat marks can be seen on the beams in the bottom picture above

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 884

442
Cold Cambering

• Cold cambering methods are more widely used and generally more economical than
heat cambering
• The beam is mounted in a frame and force from a ram(s) is used to bend the beam to
create camber
 (Ricker 1989) Image courtesy of CAMBCO Inc.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 885

Creating Camber

Image courtesy of CAMBCO Inc.

• Cambering is most commonly done at the fabricator’s shop after the connections are
fabricated (AISC 2000)
• The fabricator may mark cambered beams to ensure proper installation
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 886

443
Natural Mill Camber

• Natural mill camber, which is a slight camber present in a beam when it is received from the mill,
will exist in most beams
• If the natural mill camber is at least 75% of the specified camber, no further cambering by the
fabricator is required
• If camber is not specified, the beams will be fabricated and erected with any natural mill camber
oriented up (or concave down) (AISC 2000)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 887

Cambered Beams on Structural


Plans

Cambered beams should be clearly marked on the structural plans (AISC 2000)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 888

444
Cambered Beams on Structural
Plans

• The structural plan above shows which beams are cambered


• The amount of camber is indicated for each cambered beam
 c=3/4” indicates that the beams are cambered 3/4” at the center
 c=1 ¼” indicates that the girders are cambered 1 ¼” at the center
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 889

Installation of Cambered Beams

• The installation of cambered beams is similar to that of other structural steel members
• No additional tooling, equipment, or hardware should be required
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 890

445
Quality Control

• Per the AISC Code of Standard Practice “camber shall be measured in the Fabricator’s shop in
the unstressed condition.” (above left)
 The amount of camber specified on the shop drawing (above right) is for the beam center
line in an unstressed or unloaded condition
• Tolerances for camber are specified in the AISC Code of Standard Practice:
 Members 50 feet or less in length = minus 0” and plus 1/2”
 Members over 50 feet the plus tolerance is increased by 1/8” for every 10 feet over 50 feet
(AISC 2000)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 891

Quality Control

• It is possible for all or part of the induced camber to come out of a beam during
shipment to a jobsite
• This is acceptable under the AISC Code of Standard Practice (2000), but the
fabricator’s quality control procedure should provide verification that the specified
camber was measured in the shop
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 892

446
Cost of Cambering

• Cambered beams require additional fabrication resources which will make them cost more than
non-cambered beams
• The additional cambering cost should be compared with
 Cost of additional concrete due to “ponding”
 Cost of using shored construction
 Cost of using a heavier section that does not need to be cambered Image courtesy of CAMBCO Inc.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 893

Cost Savings from Cambering

• The cost to camber beams may be less than the alternatives


• A cost comparison can reveal the savings associated with the use of cambered beams
• Larson and Huzzard (1990), in their study of cambered beams and uncambered beams found a cost savings of
approximately 4%
• A 30’ x 30’ bay size was used
• Filler beams were spaced at 10’ o.c.
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 894

447
Impacts on the Schedule

• There will be an increase in fabrication duration for structural steel to account for time
required to create camber in beams
• The amount of time required to create camber is dependent on a fabricator’s internal
scheduling and fabrication methods Image courtesy of CAMBCO Inc.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 895

Impacts on the Schedule

 Delivery, shakeout, and erection durations should not be impacted by the use of
cambered beams

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 896

448
Structural Steel: The Material of
Choice

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 897

References
 AISC. (1991). Design Guide for Low- and Medium-Rise Steel Buildings. American Institute of
Steel Construction, Inc. Chicago, IL.
 AISC. (1999). Construction Management of Steel Construction. American Institute of Steel
Construction, Inc. Chicago, IL.
 AISC. (2000). Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. American Institute of
Steel Construction, Inc. Chicago, IL.
 AISC. (2002). Designing With Structural Steel – A Guide for Architects. American Institute of Steel
Construction, Inc. Chicago, IL .
 AISC. (2003). Design Guide for Serviceability Design Considerations for Steel Buildings, Second
Edition. American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. Chicago, IL.
 Allen, E. (1999). Fundamentals of Building Construction Materials and Methods. John Wiley &
Sons, Inc. New York, NY.
 ASCE. (2002). “Construction Considerations for Composite Steel-and-Concrete Floor Systems.”
Journal of Structural Engineering, Vol. 128, No. 9, 1099-1110.
 American Welding Society, (AWS). (2004). “Structural Welding Code – Section 7: Stud Welding.”
ANSI/AWS D1.1-98, Miami, FL.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 898

449
References Cont.
 Larson, J. W., and Huzzard, R. K. (1990). “Economical Use of Cambered Steel Beams.” Proc.
AISC Engineering Conference, Chicago, IL. 3-21.
 Means, R.S. (2004). 2004 Building Construction Cost Data. R.S. Means Company, Inc., Kingston,
MA.
 Occupational Safety & Health Administration, (OSHA). (1996). “Concrete and Masonry
Construction.” Available at: http://www.osha.gov/doc/outreachtraining/htmlfiles/concrete.html.
Viewed June, 2004.
 Ricker, Jr., D. T. (1989) . “Cambering Steel Beams.” AISC Engineering Journal, 4, 136-142.
 Richard Lees Steel Decking, (RLSD). (2002). “Composite Beams & Shear Studs – Information
Sheet CB5.” Richard Lees Steel Decking. Available at: http://www.rlsd.com/. Viewed February,
2009.
 Ruddy, J. L. (1986). “Ponding of Concrete Deck Floors.” AISC Engineering Journal, 3, 107-115.
 Steel Inspection News, (SIN). (1993). “Shear Connector Inspection – a Tutorial.” Steel Structures
Technology Center, Inc. Available at:
http://www.steelstructures.com/StlInspNews/NEWS%20index.htm. Viewed February, 2009.

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 899

CV2015 DESIGN OF
STEEL MEMBERS
Session 23
Design of Members for Combined
Forces
Chapters C and H of AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 900

450
Design of Beam-Columns
 In the design of beam-columns the effect of the
axial force acting through the deformed beam-
column must be taken into account
 The foregoing gives raise to the so-called
Second-Order Effects, which can be of two
types:
 Second-order effects P-δ, which take place when the
beam-column does not exhibit lateral displacement
 Second-order effects P-∆, which take place when the
beam-column exhibits lateral displacement
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 901

Design of Beam-Columns
 P-δ second-order effect
without intermediate load
(Note that there is no
relative lateral
displacement between
the ends of the column)

 P-δ second-order effect


with intermediate load

Reference: Salmon, Johnson and


Malhas.
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 902

451
Design of Beam-Columns
 P-∆ second-order
effect. It occurs when
the beam-column
suffers lateral
displacement
(unbraced frame)

Reference: Salmon, Johnson and


Malhas.
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 903

Design of Beam-Columns
 Ways to include the second-order effects in
design:

 By means of a computational program with


capabilities to carry out second order analyses (P-δ
and P-∆)

 By means of amplification factors applied to the


axial force and bending moments resulting from a
first-order analysis (AISC approach)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 904

452
Design of Beam-Columns
 Calculation of the required strengths for beam-columns by means of
amplification factors:
 Mnt = first-order bending moments assuming there is no lateral
translation
 Mlt = first-order bending moments due to lateral translation only
 Pnt = first-order axial force assuming there is no lateral translation
 Plt = first-order axial force due to lateral translation only

M r = B1M nt + B2 M lt
Pr = Pnt + B2 Plt
B1 , B2 are amplification factors
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 905

Design of Beam-Columns
 AISC-LRFD amplification factors for bending moments:
 P-δ second-order effect (B1)

Cm
B1 = ≥ 1.0
α Pr
1−
Pe1
π 2 EI
Pe1 = 2
; K1 ≤ 1.0
( K1L )
 0.6 − 0.4 ( M 1 M 2 )
Cm = 
1.00 or by analysis
α = 1.00 for LRFD
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 906

453
Design of Beam-Columns
 AISC-LRFD amplification factors for bending moments:
 P-∆ second-order effect (B2)
1
B2 =
α ∑ Pnt
1−
∑P e2

π 2 EI
∑ Pe2 = ∑ 2
; K 2 > 1.0
( K2 L )
1
B2 =
 ∆H 
1 − α ∑ Pnt 
 R ∑ HL 
 M 
α = 1.00 for LRFD
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 907

Design of Beam-Columns
 AISC-LRFD amplification factors for the axial force:
1
B2 =
α ∑ Pnt
1−
∑P e2

π 2 EI
∑ Pe2 = ∑ 2
; K 2 > 1.0
( K2 L )
1
B2 =
 ∆H 
1 − α ∑ Pnt  
 R ∑ HL 
 M 
α = 1.00 for LRFD
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 908

454
Design of Beam-Columns

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 909

Design of Beam - Columns

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 910

455
Design of Beam-Columns

Reference: AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 911

Design of Beam-Columns
Pr Pr
For ≥ 0.2 For < 0.2
Pc Pc
Pr  M rx M ry 
Pr 8  M rx M ry  + +  ≤ 1.0
+  +  ≤ 1.0 2 Pc  M cx M cy 
Pc 9  M cx M cy 
1 9
pPr + bx M rx + by M ry ≤ 1.0 pPr + ( bx M rx + by M ry ) ≤ 1.0
2 8

 The above is other way to write the interaction equations

 The coefficients p, bx, and by are obtained from Table 6-1 of the
13th Edition of the AISC Manual

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 912

456
Design of Beam-Columns
 In the previous slide, the quantities p, bx, and by are
given by the following equations:

1
p=
φc Pn
8
bx =
9φb M nx
8
by =
9φb M ny
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 913

Design of Beam-Columns: Procedure


1. Start with the interaction equation corresponding to
significant axial load (if you are dealing with a low axial
load case, you may want to start with the
corresponding interaction equation):

Pr > 0.2φc Pn
pPr + bx M rx + by M ry ≤ 1
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 914

457
Design of Beam-Columns: Procedure
2. Assume that either Pr (axial load effect), Mrx (x-axis
bending), or Mry (y-axis bending) is the dominant effect
3. Temporarily neglect the effects of the non-dominant
terms or use average values of the coefficients p, bx,
and/or by of the non-dominant terms (see Table
12.12.1 in Salmon, Johnson, and Malhas’ book)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 915

Design of Beam-Columns: Procedure


4. Solve for the required value of the coefficient of the
dominant term.
Keep in mind to leave some allowance for the non-
dominant terms if you temporarily neglected them
1
preqd < for Pr controling
Pr
1
bxreqd < for M rx controling
M rx
1
byreqd < for M ry controling
M ry
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 916

458
Design of Beam-Columns: Procedure
5. Other possibility for Step 4 is to use a table
containing the average values of p, bx, and by,
such as the one in Salmon, Johnson, and
Malhas’ book (see Table 12.12.1)
6. Based on the required value in Step 4 or Step
5, use Table 6-1 of the AISC Manual to make a
preliminary selection
7. Check the adequacy of the selected shape
using the appropriate interaction equation

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 917

Reference: Salmon, Johnson, and Malhas (2009)


JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 918

459
CV2015 DESIGN OF
STEEL MEMBERS
Design of Beam-Columns
Example 1

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 919

Beam-Column Design Example 1


 Design the beams and columns for the frame shown below
 The beams have lateral supports @ 8 ft
 Columns are braced at the ends so that K=1 for out of plane buckling
 Lateral loads are wind loads
w L = 2.0 k/ft, w D = 1.8 k/ft
2.9 k

w L = 2.0 k/ft, w D = 1.8 k/ft


5.8 k

Floor height = 12 ft
Altura de cada piso = 12'

Vigas W 18X65

24'
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 920

460
Beam-Column Design Example 1
21.6 k 24.0 k 0.9 k

61.7 k-ft 68.5 k-ft 11.4 k-ft


wL = 2.0 k/ft, w D = 1.8 k/ft
2.9 k

49.3 k-ft 54.8 k-ft 6.0 k-ft

wL = 2.0 k/ft, w D = 1.8 k/ft


5.8 k

43.2 k 48.0 k 3.24 k


Floor height:
Altura de cada12 ft = 12'
piso

Vigas W18X65 24.7 k-ft 27.5 k-ft 21.5 k-ft

24' 12.4 k-ft 13.75 k-ft 30.7 k-ft

Taken from: Bjorhovde, Disque, and Geschwindner


Muerta Viva Viento
Dead Live Wind

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 921

Process of Solution
 Compute factored loads
 Design the beams neglecting the effects of the
axial force
 Use the selected shapes for the beams for
beam-column design
 Carry out the final design checks including the
effects of the axial force in beams and beam-
columns (Assignment for the students)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 922

461
Beam - Column Design Example 1
 Applicable load combinations:

1 .2 D + 1 . 6 L

1 . 2 D + 0 . 8W

1 .2 D + 0 .5 L + 1 .6W

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 923

Design of the Beams


 Top beam:
1.8 kip/ft 2.0 kip/ft

Mmax = 67.9 Mmax = 75.5


61.7 61.7 68.8 68.8 11.4 11.4

(D) (L) (W)

 Bottom beam:
1.8 kip/ft 2.0 kip/ft

Mmax = 55.6 Mmax = 61.7


74 74 82.3 82.3 27.5 27.5

(D) (L) (W)


JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 924

462
Design of the Beams: Critical
Beam
 By inspection the critical beam is the one in the
first level (bottom beam)

1.2 D + 1.6 L :
M u = (1.2 )( 74 ) + (1.6 )( 82.3) = 220.48 kip − ft

1.2 D + 0.5 L + 1.6W :


M u = (1.2 )( 74 ) + ( 0.5 )( 82.3) + (1.6 )( 27.5 ) = 173.95 kip − ft
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 925

Design of the Beams


 Select the beams based on the maximum
moment
220.48 × 12
Zx = = 58.8 in 3 → W 18 × 35
0.9 × 50
Z x = 66.5 in3
φb M px = 249 kip − ft ; L p = 4.31 ft
φb M rx = 151 kip − ft ; Lr = 12.4 ft
BF = 12.1 kips
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 926

463
Design of the Beams
 Checking lateral-torsional buckling:

For Lb = 8 ft and Cb = 1.0 :


φb M nx = 249 − (12.1)( 8 − 4.31) = 204.351 kip − ft
220.48
Cbreq´ d = = 1.079 < Cbactual ∴ OK
204.351
Use W 18 × 35 for the beams

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 927

Design of the Columns


 Assume the top of columns is critical because of
the large moments (the axial force acting on the
columns is not too big in these low-rise frames)
 The critical load combination for the top column
is:

1.2 D + 1.6 L
 Wind load does not produce the critical load
condition (no lt components)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 928

464
Design of the Columns
Pnt = 64.32 kips
 First-order factored
axial force and
bending moments: Mnt top = 183.64 kip-ft

Pnt = 1.2(21.6) + 1.6(24) = 64.32 kips


M nt = 1.2(61.7) + 1.6(68.5) = 183.64 kip − ft
Plt = 0; M lt = 0

Mnt bott = 146.84 kip-ft

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 929

Design of the Columns


 Calculation of second-order effects

Pr = Pnt + B2 Plt = Pnt


M r = B1M nt + B2 M lt = B1M nt

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 930

465
Design of the Columns

 146.84 
Cmx = 0.6 − ( 0.4 )   = 0.28
 183.64 
→ B1x = 1.0 ( Cmx is too low )
Pr = Pnt + B2 Plt = Pnt = 64.32 kips
M r = B1M nt + B2 M lt = M nt = 183.64 kip − ft
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 931

Design of the Columns


 Try a W12 shape with the bending moment as the
dominant effect
 From Table 12.12.1, KL=12 ft (y-axis buckling assumed):
pavg = 1.08 × 10 −3 kips −1
1 − (1.08 × 10 −3 ) ( 64.32 ) −1
bxreq ´ d ≤ = 5.067 × 10 −3 ( kip − ft )
183.64
From Table 6-1, Try a W 12 × 40
 p = 2.85 × 10 −3 kips −1 ; bx = 4.79 × 10 −3 ( kip − ft )−1 
 
−1
For Lb = 0 ft and Cb = 1.0, bx = 4.16 × 10 −3 ( kip − ft )
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 932

466
Reference: Salmon, Johnson, and Malhas (2009)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 933

Design of the Columns

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 934

467
Design of the Columns
 Column behavior of the selected shape
K y = 1.0 → ( KL ) y = 12 ft
For x-axis buckling:

Gtop =
∑ ( I / L) cols
=
307
12 = 1.204
∑ ( I / L) beams
510
24
2 × 307
Gbottom = 12 = 2.408
510
24

Kx =
(1.6 )(1.204 )( 2.408 ) + ( 4 )(1.204 )( 3) + 7.5 = 1.55
(1.204 )( 3) + 7.5
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 935

Design of the Columns


 Column behavior of the selected shape

( KL ) x = (1.55 )(12 ) = 18.6 ft


18.6
( KL ) yeq = = 7.03 ft < ( KL ) y = 12 ft
2.64
y-axis buckling controls
p = 2.85 × 10 −3 kips −1
1
φc Pn = = 350.9 kips
p
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 936

468
Design of the Columns
 Beam behavior of the selected shape
Lb = 12 ft
M max = 183.64 kip − ft
M A = 101.0; M B = 18.4; M C = 64.22 all kip − ft

Cb =
(12.5)(183.64 )
( 2.5)(183.64 ) + ( 3)(101.0 + 64.22 ) + ( 4 )(18.4 )
4.79 × 10−3
Cb = 2.322 → bx mod = = 2.15 × 10 −3 < bxLb = 0
2.232
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 937

Design of the Columns


 Beam behavior of the selected shape
−1
bxLb = 0 = 4.16 × 10 −3 ( kip − ft )
−1
∴ bx mod = 4.16 × 10−3 ( kip − ft )
8 1
φb M nx = ×
9 bx mod
8 1
φb M nx = × = 213.7 kip − ft
9 4.16 × 10−3 ( kip − ft ) −1

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 938

469
Design of the Columns
 Evaluation of the interaction equation

pPr = ( 2.85 × 10−3 ) ( 64.32 ) = 0.183 < 0.2


pPr 9
∴ + bx M rx ≤ 1.0
2 8
0.183 9
+ × 4.16 × 10 −3 × 183.64 = 0.951 < 1.0 OK
2 8
W 12 × 40 is adequate
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 939

Design of the Columns


 If a W14 shape is selected for the columns of the frame,
with the bending moment as the dominant effect
 From Table 12.12.1, KL=12 ft (y-axis buckling assumed):
pavg = 0.68 × 10 −3 kips −1
1 − ( 0.68 × 10 −3 ) ( 64.32 ) −1
bxreq ´ d ≤ = 5.21 × 10 −3 ( kip − ft )
183.64
From Table 6-1, Try a W 14 × 38
 p = 3.74 × 10 −3 kips −1 bx = 5.00 × 10 −3 ( kip − ft ) 
−1
 
−1
For Lb = 0 ft and Cb = 1.0, bx = 3.85 × 10 −3 ( kip − ft )
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 940

470
Reference: Salmon, Johnson, and Malhas (2009)
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 941

Design of the Columns

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 942

471
Design of the Columns
 Column behavior of the selected shape
K y = 1.0
For x-axis buckling
385
Gtop = 12 = 1.51
510
24
2 × 385
Gbottom = 12 = 3.02
510
24

Kx =
(1.6 )(1.51)( 3.02 ) + ( 4 )( 3)(1.51) + 7.5 = 1.65
(1.51)( 3) + 7.5
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 943

Design of the Columns


 Column behavior of the selected shape

( KL ) x = (1.65 )(12 ) = 19.85 ft


19.85
( KL ) yeq = = 5.24 ft < ( KL ) y = 12 ft
3.79
y-axis buckling controls
p = 3.74 × 10 −3 kips −1
1
φc Pn = = 267.4 kips
p
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 944

472
Design of the Columns
 Beam behavior of the selected shape
Lb = 12 ft
M max = 183.64 kip − ft
M A = 101.0; M B = 18.4; M C = 64.22 all kip − ft

Cb =
(12.5)(183.64 )
( 2.5)(183.64 ) + ( 3)(101.0 + 64.22 ) + ( 4 )(18.4 )
5.00 × 10 −3
Cb = 2.322 → bx mod = = 2.24 × 10 −3 < bxLb = 0
2.232
JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 945

Design of the Columns


 Beam behavior of the selected shape
−1
bxLb = 0 = 3.85 × 10−3 ( kip − ft )
−1
∴ bx mod = 3.85 × 10 −3 ( kip − ft )
8 1
φb M nx = ×
9 bx mod
8 1
φb M nx = × = 230.9 kip − ft
9 3.85 × 10 −3 ( kip − ft )−1

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 946

473
Design of the Columns
 Evaluation of the interaction equation

pPr = 3.74 × 10 −3 × 64.32 = 0.241 > 0.2


pPr + bx M rx = 0.241 + ( 3.85 × 10−3 ) (183.64 ) = 0.948
pPr + bx M rx < 1.0 OK
W 14 × 38 is also adequate

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 947

Beam-Column Design Example 1


 Conclusion:

 Use W18x35 for the beams and W12x40 or W14x38


for the columns

 The frame must be reanalyzed in order to verify that


the selected shapes are adequate to resist the loads,
based on the results of a structural analysis using the
actual properties of the members

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 948

474
Frame to be Designed

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 949

Dead Load

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 950

475
Live Load

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 951

Wind Load

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 952

476
Analysis Results – Axial Force (D)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 953

Analysis Results – Axial Force (L)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 954

477
Analysis Results – Axial Force (W)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 955

Analysis Results – Moment (D)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 956

478
Analysis Results – Moment (L)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 957

Analysis Results – Moment (W)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 958

479
Analysis Results – Shear (D)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 959

Analysis Results – Shear (L)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 960

480
Analysis Results – Shear (W)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 961

CV2015 DESIGN OF STEEL MEMBERS

DIRECT ANALYSIS METHOD

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 962

481
Direct Analysis Method: Steps
1. Develop an analysis model
2. Determine the lateral loads
3. Calculate the notional loads
4. Perform 2nd order analysis
5. Design beams and girders

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 963

Direct Analysis Method: Steps


6. Design compression members and braces
7. Design beam-columns
8. Check seismic drift limits (not in this course)
9. Check seismic P-∆ limits (not in this course)
10. Check wind drift limits (not in this course)

JANUARY-MAY, 2011 CARLOS ENRIQUE NUNGARAY PÉREZ 964

482

You might also like